k engineering & maintenance

Training E & M
Boeing 747-400
Training manual

ATA-23 COMMUNICATION
(PART 1)

Config: ALL
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
Boeing 747-400
Training manual

NOTES:

Config: ALL
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION ................... 2 FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - JACK PANELS ...................... 36
FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM .................................................. 4 FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - FLIGHT INTERPHONE JACK 38
FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COMPONENT FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - MICROPHONES AND HEAD-
LOCATIONS - 1 ........................................................................ 6 SETS ........................................................................................ 40
FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COMPONENT FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - CONTROL WHEEL PTT
LOCATIONS - 2 ........................................................................ 8 SWITCH ................................................................................... 42
FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COMPONENT FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COCKPIT SPEAKER ............. 44
LOCATIONS - 3 ........................................................................ 10 FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - AUDIO CONTROL PANEL .... 51
FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COMPONENT FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - PTT ........................................ 54
LOCATIONS - 4 ........................................................................ 12 FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - TRANSMIT AUDIO/PTT ........ 57
FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - POWER ................................. 16 FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - TOWING POWER ................. 18 RECEIVE AUDIO/VOICE RECORDER OUTPUT ................... 60
FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - CAPTAINS FLIGHT DECK FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - EMERGENCY FREQUENCY
INTERFACE .............................................................................. 20 MONITOR ................................................................................ 62
FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - FLIGHT DECK INTERFACES 22 FLIGHT INTERPHONE SCHEMATIC - FLT/SERV INTERPHONE
FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COMMUNICATION SYSTEM AUDIO ...................................................................................... 64
INTERFACES ........................................................................... 24 FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM-CALL LIGHT OPERATION ...... 66
FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - NAVIGATION SYSTEM INTER- FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM-NAVIGATION RADIO AUDIO .. 69
FACES ..................................................................................... 26 FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - OBSERVER AUDIO SYSTEM
FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - AUDIO CONTROL PANEL .... 28 SWITCHING ............................................................................ 72
FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - AUDIO MANAGEMENT UNIT 32 FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - CMC INTERFACE ................. 74
FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - FLIGHT DECK EFFECTS AND
CONTROL CONSOLE ............................................................. 34 CMCS MESSAGES .................................................................. 76

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 1
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION

The flight interphone system provides voice communications and

audio monitoring between the:

- Flight crew personnel

- Flight crew and ground crew
- Flight crew and communications systems and navigation radio

23.51.0701 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 2
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0201 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 3
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM

General Description

The flight interphone system's audio management unit (AMU) The service interphone system interfaces with the flight interphone
controls audio signals going to and from the flight crew. The flight system and is paralleled with the flight interphone using a switch on
crew select audio signals to monitor, and connect their microphone the miscellaneous switch control module. The module also has the
(handheld, headset, or oxygen mask) to a communications observer's audio system switch that controls a backup mode used
transceiver, passenger address system, or cabin interphone system when the captain's or first officer's audio system fails.
using an audio control panel (ACP). The microphone (MIC) is keyed
using either the ACP, control wheel PTT switch, or the switch on the The AMU receives a discrete from the radio communication panels
handheld microphone. Audio signals are sent to a headset or the when they are tuned to the emergency frequency. This selects VHF
cockpit speaker. audio monitoring automatically.

The SELCAL decoder and ACARS send discretes which turn on call
Interfaces lights on the ACPs.

The AMU sends PTT and MIC audio to the communications The voice recorder gets three channels of both MIC and selected
systems, and gets audio back from them. audio signals.

The AMU gets audio from the navigation radios. The control display Fault information goes to the central maintenance computer system
units (CDUs) send a distance measuring equipment (DME) pairing so it may record faults as they occur.
discrete to put DME audio on either the VHF omni range (VOR) or
23.51.0702 -002
instrument landing system (ILS) audio channel.Ground crew
interface with the flight interphone system through jacks in the main
equipment center (MEC) and nose wheel well control panel.

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 4
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0202 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 5
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 1

The flight interphone system components are:

- Captain's interphone circuit breaker

- First officer's interphone circuit breaker
- Observer's interphone circuit breaker
- Captain's cockpit speaker
- First officer's cockpit speaker
- Control wheel PTT switches
- Captain's audio control panel (ACP)
- First officer's ACP
- First observer's ACP
- Second observer's ACP
- Miscellaneous switch control module

23.51.0703 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 6
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0203 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 7
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 2

These are also flight interphone system components:

- Captain's oxygen mask stowage box (mask mic)

- Captain's jack panel
- Captain's handmic jack
- Second observer's jack panel

23.51.0704 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 8
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0204 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 9
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 3

These are also flight interphone system components:

- First officer's oxygen mask stowage box (mask mic)

- First officer's jack panel
- First officer's handmic jack
- First observer's oxygen mask stowage box (mask mic)
- First observer's jack panel
- First observer's handmic jack

23.51.0705 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 10
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0205 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 11
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 4

Components in the main equipment center (MEC) are the:

- AMU
- Flight interphone headphone jack
- Flight interphone handmic jack

The jacks are at station 440, waterline 160.

Components on the nose wheel well control panel (P37) are the:

- Flight interphone headset jack - Flight deck call switch

23.51.0706 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 12
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0206 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 13
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 14
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0207 -011

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 15
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - POWER

Each circuit card in the audio management unit (AMU) has a voltage Each ACP also gets voltages from the master dim and test system
regulator which provides operating voltages to that card. (MD&T). 28 volt dc is for the:

Either the captain's interphone towing circuit breaker, the towing - Call lights
ground handling bus circuit breaker, or the captain's interphone - MIC lights
circuit breaker goes to the: - Receive LEDs

- Captain's card Five volts ac is for the panel lights.

- Captain's cockpit speaker
- Interface card The voltage regulator on the interface card provides operating
- Captain's audio control panel (ACP) voltages to the flight interphone circuits on that card. This voltage
regulator gets power from all of the pilot's station circuit cards. The
The first officer's circuit breaker goes to the: diodes provide isolation of this output between the pilot's station
circuit cards.
- Interface card
23.51.0708 -003
- First officer's card
- First officer's cockpit speaker
- First officer's ACP

The observer's interphone circuit breaker goes to the:

- First observer's card

- Second observer's card
- Interface card
- First observer's ACP
- Second observer's ACP

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 16
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0208 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 17
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - TOWING POWER

General

Towing power circuitry allows audio communication from the The ground handling bus is used when all of these conditions are
captain's station during towing without any power to the airplane. true:
The captain's station can communicate with the flight interphone
jacks or the left VHF communications transceiver. These are the - Ground handling bus is powered
three possible sources of power to the captain's station:
- Towing power backup switch (S1) is in the ENABLE position
- Main battery hot bus
- Ground handling bus - Standby power switch (S18) is OFF
- APU battery bus

APU Battery Bus Power

Main Hot Battery Bus Power
The APU battery bus is used when the battery switch is on and
The main hot battery bus is used when all of these conditions are either of these is true:
true:
- Towing power backup switch (S1) is in the DISABLE position
- Ground handling bus is not powered
- Standby power switch (S18) is in the AUTO or BATT position
- Towing power backup switch (S1) is in the ENABLE position
23.51.0709 -001

- Standby power switch (S18) is OFF Ground Handling Bus Power

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 18
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0209 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 19
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - CAPTAINS FLIGHT DECK

INTERFACE

Purpose

The audio management unit (AMU) emergency communication L VHF audio goes to the cockpit voice recorder (CVR).
interface connects the captain's jack panel with the left VHF
transceiver during a total AMU failure. The oxygen mask audio is not switched by the relays.

The captain gets maximum volume audio from the left VHF
Functional description transceiver.

With the switch on the miscellaneous switch control panel in the All of the PTT functions are normal
VHF-L direct communication, 28v dc from the main battery bus
circuit breaker goes to the emergency communication relays. The
28v dc energizes the emergency communication relays and
connects the captain's jack panel to the left VHF transceiver.

With the emergency communication relays energized, the inputs

and outputs connected to the left VHF transceiver are:

- Left VHF transceiver audio

- Boom mic audio
- R/T PTT of the captain's audio control panel

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 20
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 21
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - FLIGHT DECK INTERFACES

The flight interphone system's flight deck interfaces are arranged The control wheel PTT switches are connected in parallel with the
into these three audio stations: station's audio control panel PTT switches. The receive/transmit (R/
T) and interphone (INT) PTT signals then go to the audio
- captain's station management unit.
- first officer's station
- first observer's station The miscellaneous switch control module has two switches that go
to the audio management unit.
Each station is connected to a circuit card within the audio
management unit. These circuit cards receive inputs from the - Observer's audio system switch
station, route the appropriate audio signals, and provide indications - Service interphone switch
of the selections made.
The second observer has a headphone jack which monitors the first
Each station has these controls and audio interfaces: observer's audio.

23.51.0710 -008
- Audio Control Panel
- Hand held microphone
- Headset
- Headphone
- Oxygen mask microphone and door switch (mask mic on/off)

The captain's and first officer's stations also have these interfaces:

- cockpit speaker
- control wheel PTT switches

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 22
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0210 -008

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 23
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

INTERFACES

The audio management unit (AMU) sends all audio signals based The passenger address controller receives microphone audio and a
on the selections made at the audio control panel (ACP). PTT signal during PA announcements, and sends the sidetone and
announcements back to the AMU.
The six communications transceivers provide audio outputs to the
AMU and receive microphone audio and PTT signals. Flight interphone jacks on the P37 nosewheel well panel and in the
main equipment center are used to communicate with the ground
The SELCAL decoder and ACARS send call set discretes to the crew.
AMU to turn on the call lights of the ACPs. The AMU sends call
reset discretes to the SELCAL decoder and ACARS to cancel the The three radio communication panels (RCPs) send a discrete to
call discrete, which turns out the call lights. the AMU when 121.5 MHz is the active frequency.

The service interphone switch on the miscellaneous switch control The AMU sends ARINC 429 data to the central maintenance
module connects the service interphone jacks with flight interphone computers to report faults as they are detected.
audio.

23.51.0711 -001
The cabin interphone controller (CIC) sends a cabin call pulsed
discrete to the AMU to turn on the CAB call light on the ACPs. The
CIC sends a call reset pulse to the AMUs which turns out the call
lights. Cabin interphone audio also goes to the AMU.

The AMU sends a priority call discrete when a CAB transmit switch
is pushed twice. Microphone audio and a PTT signal go to the CIC
during cabin interphone calls.

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 24
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0211 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 25
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - NAVIGATION SYSTEM

INTERFACES

These navigation radios provide audio outputs to the audio The left and right electronic flight instrument system (EFIS) control
management unit: panels send navigation display mode selection data to the onside
control display units (CDUs). The CDUs send a DME pairing
- Left instrument landing system (ILS) receiver discrete to the AMU based on the EFIS control panel data. The
DME pairing discrete tells the AMU to place DME audio on either
- Center ILS receiver the VOR or ILS audio channel.

23.51.0712 -001
- Right ILS receiver

- Left VHF omni-range (VOR) receiver

- Right VOR receiver

- Left automatic direction finder (ADF) receiver

- Right ADF receiver

- Left distance measuring equipment (DME) interrogator

- Right DME interrogator

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 26
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0212 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 27
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - AUDIO CONTROL PANEL

Purpose

The audio control panel (ACP) gives the flight crew control of the To connect a microphone (boom, OXY, or handheld) to a
communication and navigation systems audio. communication radio or system, push the associated transmit
switch. Only one system can be selected at a time. Once pushed,
the transmit switch causes:
Controls
- The white MIC light on the upper half of that transmit switch to
Controls on the audio control panel are: turn on.

- Transmit switches - The audio of the associated system to turn on to the volume
- Receiver controls selected by the receiver control.
- PTT switch
- Approach receiver selector When the ACP first gets power, all transmit switches are
- VOR/ADF receiver selector de-selected.
- Filter selector
- Cockpit speaker control When the cabin interphone (CAB) transmit switch is pressed twice
within three seconds, a call is made to an attendant's station. The
attendant's station is determined by the configuration program of the
Indications advanced cabin entertainment and service system (ACESS).

These indications are on the ACP:

23.51.0713A-001

- Receive lights
- Call lights
- Mic lightsOperation

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 28
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Operation (cont)

The lower half of the transmit switches is a white call light. This light
turns on when the respective system calls the flight crew. The position of the approach receiver selector determines which of
these navigation radio's audio is selected by the associated receiver
A call light goes out when the associated transmit switch is pushed. control:
If the transmit switch is already selected, key the microphone to
reset the call light. The flight interphone call light can also be reset - Left ILS receiver
with the INT position of the PTT switch on the ACP. - Center ILS receiver
- Right ILS receiver
The VHF and HF call lights are turned on by the SELCAL input to - Marker beacon receiver.
the AMU. The CAB call light is activated by the cabin interphone
controller input while the FLT call light is activated by the flight deck The VOR/ADF selector determines which VOR or ADF receiver is
call switch on the P37 nosewheel panel. selected by the associated receiver control.

To listen to a communication or navigation system's audio, push the

23.51.0713B-001
receiver control (push-on, push-off) and turn it to adjust the volume.
Any combination of systems can be monitored at any given time.
The green receive light turns on to show that the associated
receiver control is on.The PTT switch is a spring loaded, return to
center switch. In the R/T position, it keys either the oxygen mask
mic or the boom mic to the system selected by a transmit switch. In
the INT position it keys the oxygen mask mic or boom mic to the
flight interphone system, regardless of which transmit switch is
selected.

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 29
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Operation (cont)

The filter selector determines how the VOR, ADF, and ILS audio is
processed by the AMU. In the B (both) position, voice and range
(coded station identification) frequencies are both passed through to
the audio output. In the V (voice) position, only voice frequencies
are passed while the 1020 Hz range frequency is filtered out. In the
R (range) position only the range frequency is passed while the
voice frequencies are filtered out.

The cockpit speaker control turns on or off and adjusts the volume
of the cockpit speaker. This function only operates on the audio
control panels in the captain's or first officer's positions.

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.51.0713C-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 30
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0213 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 31
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - AUDIO MANAGEMENT UNIT

Purpose

The audio management unit (AMU) monitors the inputs from the CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
audio control panels (ACPs) to provide correct routing and signal READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
processing of the: ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
- Comm transceivers audio BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.
- Nav transceivers audio
23.51.0714 -001
- Passenger address (PA) audio
- Cabin interphone audio
- Flight interphone audio
- SELCAL and ACARS call alerts and resets

Characteristics

The AMU has four circuit cards, three crew interface cards and one
general interface card, they are the:

- Captain's card
- First officer's card
- First observer's card
- AMU interface card

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 32
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0214 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 33
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEM

CONTROL CONSOLE

General Capt audio system Switch

The miscellaneous switch control module contains two switches that When the capt audio switch (CAPT AUDIO SYSTEM) is in the
affect the flight interphone system: NORM position, the VHF L signals are routed through the AMU.
When capt audio system switch is in VHF-L DIRECT, the AMU is
- Cargo interphone switch (Combi Airplanes Only) bypassed.
- Service interphone switch
- Observer audio system switch
- Capt audio system switch Observer Audio System Switch

The observer (OBS) audio system switch controls the inputs and
Service Interphone Switch outputs into the first observer's card in the audio management unit
(AMU). When the switch is in the CAPT position, the captain's
When the service interphone switch (SERV INT) is in the ON inputs and outputs are connected to the first observer's card.
position, the flight interphone system and the service interphone
system audio signals are combined. When the switch is in the F/O position, the first officer's inputs and
outputs are connected to the first observer's card.

Cargo Interphone Switch In the NORM position, the first observer's inputs and outputs
connect to the first observer's card.
When the cargo interphone switch (CARGO INT) is in the ON
position, the flight interphone system and the cargo interphone This feature lets the captain or first officer use the first observer's
system audio signals are combined. audio control panel (ACP) to replace their associated ACP, in case it
or their pilot's station circuit card fails.

23.51.0715 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 34
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0215 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 35
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - JACK PANELS

Headsets and headphones are connected to jack panels at these

crew stations:

- Captain's jack panel

- First officer's jack panel
- First observer's jack panel
- Second observer's jack panel

The second observer's jack panel has a headphone jack for

monitoring the first observer's audio. The captain, first officer and
first observer handmic jacks are in a remote location from the
related jack panels.

23.51.0716 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 36
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0216 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 37
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - FLIGHT INTERPHONE JACK

The ground crew can talk to the flight crew on the flight interphone
system. To do this a headset is connected to the flight interphone
jack on the nose wheel well control panel.

When pushed, the flight deck call switch causes the flight
interphone CALL light on all audio control panels (ACPs) to turn on.

23.51.0717 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 38
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0217 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 39
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - MICROPHONES AND

HEADSETS

Purpose Oxygen Mask

The microphones and headsets give audio input and output to and A carbon microphone is in the oxygen masks to allow
from the audio management unit (AMU). communications during an emergency condition. These units do not
have a preamplifier. An oxygen mask microphone is activated by the
PTT switches on the control wheels or the ACPs.
Headset

The headset is a combination boom microphone and headphone. It Headphones

allows the crew members hand free operation. It contains a
microphone, and amplifier which transmits audio at the level that is The headphones monitor audio from the AMU.
required by the AMU. The boom microphone is activated by the PTT
23.51.0718 -002
switches on the control wheels or the audio control panels (ACPs).
The headset also has an earpiece to allow audio monitoring.

Handheld Microphone

The handheld microphone has a transistorized preamplifier that

sends audio signals at a level required by the AMU. A PTT switch is
on the microphone.

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 40
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0218 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 41
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - CONTROL WHEEL PTT

SWITCH

The Control Wheel PTT switch gives PTT inputs to the audio
management unit (AMU) for the boom or oxygen mask
microphones. The switch is a three-position switch and is on the
outboard horn of the captain's and the first officer's control wheel.

In the MIC position, MIC audio is sent to the selected

communication system. In the INT position, MIC audio goes directly
to the flight interphone system without selecting the FLT transmit
switch on the audio control panel (ACP).

23.51.0719 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 42
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0219 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 43
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COCKPIT SPEAKER

The captain's and first officer's cockpit speakers:

- Get audio from the audio management unit (AMU).

- Are controlled from the captain's and first officer's audio control
panels (ACP).

23.51.0721 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 44
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0221 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 45
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 46
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0222A-011

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 47
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 48
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0222B-011

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 49
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 50
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - AUDIO CONTROL PANEL

General

Each audio control panel (ACP) has an interface with the audio digital converter and the the multiplexer.
management unit (AMU). The clocking signals to the ACPs are
produced by the AMU. The multiplexer sends the selected receiver control potentiometer
setting to the analog to digital converter. The potentiometer analog
input setting is changed to a parallel digital word. The parallel digital
AMU Interface word goes to the output shift registers. The output shift registers
receive position inputs from the:
The pilot's station circuit cards in the AMU are controlled by a
microprocessor. Each microprocessor has an interface with its - Transmit switches
onside ACP. It also: - Cockpit speaker control
- Filter selector
- Produces the clocking signal that is sent to the ACP - Approach receiver selector
- Processes the serial data input from the ACP - VOR/ADF receiver selector
- Sends the serial data to the ACP according to the serial data it
received from the ACP The shift registers change parallel inputs to serial data outputs. The
serial data is amplified by the output data amplifier and transmitted
to the AMU.
ACP Operation

23.51.0723A-001
The serial data output to the ACP from the AMU is amplified by the
input data amplifier. The input shift registers change the serial input
to a parallel output. The parallel outputs from the input shift registers
control the lamp drivers to turn on the different front panel lights.
The sync provides clock signals to the input shift registers, analog to

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 51
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ACP operation (cont)

The ACP front panel lights receive 28 volts dc from the master dim
and test circuits. Each of the CALL and MIC lights and the receiver
control lights are controlled by the lamp drivers in the ACP.

The transmit switches, that are electronically interlocked, send a

ground to the output shift register when they are pushed.

The receiver control switches send a ground to the output shift

register when they are pushed.

The potentiometer (POT) setting output to the multiplexer changes

in voltage as the receiver control is turned.

Test

The serial output from the input shift register to the serial input of
the output shift register is used to test the ACP data shifting
capabilities.

To test the lights on the ACP, the master dim and test circuits send a
ground to the lamp drivers.

This causes all the lights on the panel to come on.

23.51.0723B-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 52
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0223 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 53
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - PTT

The captain and first officer send a PTT through the audio
management unit (AMU) to the appropriate communication system
with:

- The control wheel PTT switch

- The handmic PTT
- The audio control panel (ACP) PTT switch

The control wheel and ACP also have a switch to key the flight
interphone.

The first observer sends a PTT only from the handmic and ACP.

23.51.0724 -009

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 54
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0224 -009

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 55
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 56
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - TRANSMIT AUDIO/PTT

General Mic Input Processing

The captain's audio control panel (ACP) sends the transmit switch The hand mic audio is combined with either the headset or oxygen
selections to the captain's card in the audio management unit mask mic audio. The combined audio then goes to the transmit
(AMU). The AMU sends the hand mic, oxygen mask mic, and selector. The microprocessor monitors the transmit switch selection
headset mic audio along with the PTT signal to these locations: on the ACP. The microprocessor then sends a signal to the transmit
selector. The transmit selector then routes the mic audio to the
- Transceivers appropriate communication system. Audio outputs of the other
- Passenger address system (PA) pilot's station circuit cards connect with these outputs.
- Cabin interphone system (CAB)
- Flight interphone system
PTT Processing

Mic Excitation The microprocessor monitors the transmit switch selections on the
ACP and sends a signal to the decoder to close the appropriate
All microphones at the captain's station receive 15 volts dc switch. These switches allow the PTT signal to go to the selected
excitation (+V) from the captain's card. communication system. PTT outputs of the other pilot's station
circuit cards connect with these outputs.

23.51.0725A-001
Oxygen Mask Mic/Headset Mic Selection

The headset mic audio normally goes through S1 to the transmit

selector. If the oxygen mask stowage box is opened, a ground goes
to S1. This lets the oxygen mask mic audio go to the transmit
selector. To remove the ground from S1, close the stowage box
doors and push the reset switch.

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 57
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PTT Processing (cont)

The interphone (INT) PTT goes through an inverter to switch S2.

When the interphone is keyed, S2 closes and the mic audio
bypasses the transmit selector. This is done so that flight interphone
transmissions may be heard at the other pilot's stations without
having to select the interphone receiver control.

Speaker Muting

When either the captain or first officer keys a microphone, a signal

goes to the speaker muting circuit on the interface card. The
speaker muting circuit causes both speakers to be muted if the
oxygen mask is not selected. The PTT signal can also come from
the first observer's card when the observer's audio system switch is
not in the normal position.

23.51.0725B-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 58
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0225 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 59
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

RECEIVE AUDIO/VOICE RECORDER OUTPUT

The captain's card receives audio inputs from the different The mute circuit also sends a mute signal to the mute switch in the
communication systems. The microprocessor sets the eight volume first officer's card. The captain's or the first officer's card causes a
control circuits for the eight audio inputs according to the settings of mute of both the captain's and the first officer's cockpit speakers.
the captain's audio control panel (ACP) receiver controls. The
outputs from the volume control circuits are summed with any NAV The microprocessor controls the volume control circuit for the
receiver audio. captain's cockpit speaker. It uses the setting of the cockpit speaker
control on the captain's ACP.
The summed audio is then:
NOTE: The first officer's, first observer's cards operate the same as
- Summed with the hot mic audio and sent to the voice recorder the captain card. The first observer's card cockpit speaker output is
not connected to either cockpit speaker normally.
- Amplified and sent to the captain's jack panel
23.51.0726 -002

- Amplified and sent through the muting circuit and the volume
control circuit to the captain's cockpit speaker.

The mute circuit monitors the captain's and first officer's PTT inputs
and the oxygen mask on/off inputs. The first observer's PTT and
oxygen mask on/off is monitored when the observer's audio system
switch is not in the normal position. When the oxygen mask is off
and there is an active PTT, the mute circuit attenuates input to the
volume control circuit of the captain cockpit speaker. This avoids
feedback at the captain's station.

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 60
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0226 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 61
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - EMERGENCY FREQUENCY

MONITOR

The radio communication panels (RCPs) send an analog discrete

(ground) to the audio management unit (AMU) when the emergency
frequency of 121.5 MHz is tuned. This ground from the RCP lets the
VHF audio of the transceiver tuned to 121.5 MHz to be heard at all
stations without having to press a receiver control switch.

23.51.0727 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 62
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0227 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 63
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SCHEMATIC - FLT/SERV INTERPHONE

23.51.0728 -003
AUDIO

General

When the SERV INT switch on the miscellaneous switch control

module is ON, the flight interphone system and the service
interphone system audios are mixed together.

Flight Interphone Audio

The flight interphone audio from the captain's, first officer's,and first
observer's cards are mixed together. This is done in the AMU
interface card.

The output of the cards also mixes the flight interphone audio with
the ground crew flight interphone audio. The flight interphone input
from the ground crew comes through the:

- Flight interphone jack(s) on the nose wheel well control panel

- Main equipment center jack

The output of the cards also goes to a switch which mixes the flight
interphone audio with the service interphone audio. This happens
when the SERV INT switch is in the ON position.

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 64
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0228 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 65
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM-CALL LIGHT OPERATION

General
Cabin Interphone Controller Interface
The audio management unit (AMU) turns on a call light, on all the
audio control panels (ACP's), when a call set signal comes from the The cabin interphone controller sends a call set signal to the AMU
SELCAL decoder, ACARS, or cabin interphone controller. when a cabin interphone handset calls the flight deck or the flight
deck call switch on the nosewheel well panel is pressed. The call set
The call light goes out on all ACPs when the associated transmit discrete is processed and reset the same way as a call set from the
switch on any ACP is selected. If the transmit switch is already SELCAL decoder.
selected, the call light goes out when the microphone is keyed.

ACARS Interface
SELCAL Decoder Interface
ACARS sends a call set signal to the AMU when a request for voice
The SECAL decoder receives audio from the five communications communications is received. The input to the AMU is through a
transceivers to detect a call from the ground. The SECAL decoder seperate pin, but does the same thing as a call to the AMU by the
sends a ground discrete on one of five outputs to the AMU when a SELCAL decoder for the center VHF. The call set discrete is
call is received. The AMU sends the discrete to the four pilot's processed and reset the same way as a call set from the SELCAL
station circuit cards, which then send a signal to their ACP to turn on decoder.
the call light. A pilot's station circuit card sends a reset signal to the
23.51.0729 -003
SELCAL decoder to turn off the set discrete when the transmit
switch is selected, or microphone is keyed (transmit switch already
selected).

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 66
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0229 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 67
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 68
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM-NAVIGATION RADIO AUDIO

General

The crew interface cards receive audio from these navigation

radios: The audio goes through the range and notch filters. From the filters,
the audio goes to another multiplexer which passes audio, based on
- Left and right VHF omni-range (VOR) the ACP filter switch, to a junction where the navigation radio audio
is combined with communication system audio. This combined
- Left and right automatic direction finder (ADF) audio then goes to:

- Left, center, and right instrument landing system (ILS) - The speaker muting switch which feeds the cockpit speaker

- Marker beacon - Jack panels

- Left and right distance measuring equipment (DME) - The cockpit voice recorder.

Only one of the VOR or ADF receivers is selected at a time. Only

one of the ILS or marker beacon receivers is selected at a time. DME Pairing

The AMU gets the DME pairing from the onside control display unit
Audio Processing (CDU). In the approach mode the discrete is a ground. In the VOR,
MAP or PLAN mode the discrete is open.
The navigation radio audio inputs go to multiplexers. The multiplexer
23.51.0730A-001
pass only the signals selected on the audio control panel (ACP).

The selected audio signals go to a volume control circuit. The ACP

receiver volume control sets the audio level.

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 69
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

DME Pairing (cont.)

The pairing discrete is used by the AMU to pair the DME audio with When BOTH is selected, navigation radio audio is not filtered. There
the: are two exceptions to audio going through the filters:

- VOR audio when the electronic flight indicating system (EFIS) - Marker beacon audio does not go through the notch or band
control panel is in the VOR, MAP, or PLAN mode filters.

- ILS audio when the EFIS control panel is in the APPROACH - DME audio is heard in the range and both modes only.
mode.

Filters

Filters are used to pass or inhibit the 1020 Hz morse code tones
used to identify the selected navigation radio stations. The filter
switch on the ACP has three positions:

- VOICE
- BOTH
- RANGE

When VOICE is selected on the ACP, navigation radio audio is sent

through the notch filter which inhibits the 1020 Hz tones.

When RANGE is selected, the navigation radio audio is sent

through the band filter which passes only the 1020 Hz tones.

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 70
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0230 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 71
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - OBSERVER AUDIO SYSTEM

23.51.0731 -001
SWITCHING

The observer audio system switch controls the inputs and outputs of
the first observer's card in the audio management unit (AMU). The
switch has three positions:

- NORM (normal)
- CAPT (captain on observer)
- F/O (first officer on observer)

With the switch in the NORM position, the first observer's AMU
inputs and outputs are connected to the first observer's card.

When the switch is in the CAPT position, relays K1-K4 and K5-K8
energize. This causes the captain's AMU inputs and outputs to be
disconnected from the captain's card and connected to the first
observer's card. The captain then controls his audio using the first
observer's audio control panel (ACP). When the switch is in the F/O
position, relays K5-K8 and K9-K12 energize. This causes the first
officer's AMU inputs and outputs to transfer to the first observer
card. The first observer's AMU inputs and outputs are disconnected.
The first officer then controls his audio using the first observer's
ACP.

The first observers PTT and audio out signals do not go through the
relays. In the backup mode, the observer can still monitor the audio
selections made, and the captain can key his microphone from the
observers ACP.

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 72
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0231 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 73
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - CMC INTERFACE

The audio management unit (AMU) does a continuous BITE and

provides real-time fault status to both central maintenance
computers (CMCs).

The AMU interface card microcomputer gives fault data to the left
and right CMCs. The fault summary word sent to the CMCs gives
status on:

- The captain's, first officer's and first observers' cards.

- The captain's, first officer's, and first observer's audio control

panels (ACPs).

23.51.0732 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 74
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0232 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 75
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

FLIGHT INTERPHONE SYSTEM - FLIGHT DECK EFFECTS AND

CMCS MESSAGES

Flight Deck Effects

There are no maintenance related flight deck effects for the flight The CMCS has logic to monitor the combination of interface faults
interphone system. reported to the CMCS. This logic determines the messages that
show. The CMCS fault messages associated with interface faults
are:
LRU Internal Fault Messages
- AUDIO MANAGEMENT UNIT==>CMC BUS FAIL
These central maintenance computer system (CMCS) fault
messages show when an LRU detects internal faults and reports NOTE: X = Captain's, first officer's, first observer's, or second
them directly to the CMCs or EIUs: observer's.

23.51.0733 -001
- AUDIO MANAGEMENT UNIT FAIL X CHANNEL

LRU Faults Reported by Other LRUs

These CMCS fault messages show when an LRU reports another

component's status or when an LRU that monitors other
components detects and reports a fault or condition of those
components to the CMCS or EIUs:

- X AUDIO CONTROL PANEL FAILInterface Fault Messages

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 76
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.51.0233 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 77
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Flight Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-51

Issue: 1 Page 78
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION................. 2

SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM ............................................... 4
SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COMPONENT
LOCATIONS............................................................................... 6
SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - JACK LOCATIONS ............. 8
SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - INTERFACE DIAGRAM ...... 10
SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - SERVICE INTERPHONE
SWITCH ................................................................................... 12
SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - JACK AND HEADSET ........ 14
SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - AUDIO MANAGEMENT
UNIT ........................................................................................... 16
SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM ..... 18

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 1
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION

The service interphone system allows communication between

ground crew members at different locations on the airplane.

The service interphone system can connect to the flight interphone

system to allow communication between ground crew members and
the flight deck.

23.41.0701 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 2
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.41.0201 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 3
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM

The service interphone jacks are divided into three groups:

- Forward service interphone

- Mid service interphone
- Aft service interphone

The microphone inputs in each group are combined into three audio
inputs to the audio management unit (AMU).

The AMU combines the three service interphone microphone inputs,

amplifies them, and sends them back to each group.

The service interphone audio is combined with flight interphone

audio if the service interphone switch is set to the ON position.

The AMU sends fault status to the central maintenance computer

system (CMCS).

23.41.0702 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 4
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.41.0202 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 5
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - COMPONENT LOCATIONS

These components are located in the flight deck:

- Service interphone switch (miscellaneous switch control module)

- Service interphone circuit breaker

The audio management unit (AMU) is located in the main equipment

center.

23.41.0703 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 6
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.41.0203 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 7
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - JACK LOCATIONS

23.41.0704 -001

The service interphone jacks are located on the airplane as follows:

- A. Forward equipment center (INTERNAL)

- B. Nose wheel well panel P-37 (EXTERNAL)
- C. Main equipment center (INTERNAL)
- D. Forward cargo compartment (INTERNAL)
- E. Center equipment center (INTERNAL)
- F. Air conditioner equipment bay (EXTERNAL)
- G. Ground air inlet (EXTERNAL)
- H. Engine 4 nacelle (EXTERNAL)
- I. Engine 3 nacelle (EXTERNAL)
- J. Engine 2 nacelle (EXTERNAL)
- K. Engine 1 nacelle (EXTERNAL)
- L. Right wheel well (EXTERNAL)
- M. Left wheel well (EXTERNAL)
- N. Right refuel (EXTERNAL)
- O. Left refuel (EXTERNAL)
- P. AFT cargo equipment panel (INTERNAL)
- Q. AFT equipment center (INTERNAL)
- R. Tailcone (INTERNAL)
- S. APU (INTERNAL)

WARNING: DO NOT USE ENGINE NACELLE INTERPHONE JACK

ON ENGINE WHICH IS TO BE STARTED OR IS IN
OPERATION. PERSONNEL MAY BE INJURED BY
ENGINE INLET SUCTION OR EXHAUST BLAST.

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 8
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.41.0204 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 9
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - INTERFACE DIAGRAM

The service interphone system gets 28v dc from the APU battery
bus through the INTERPHONE SERV circuit breaker on the
overhead circuit breaker panel. This powers the service interphone
amplifiers and circuits in the audio management unit (AMU).

There are nineteen service interphone jacks located at servicing

stations around the airplane. The jacks are divided into three groups:

- Service interphone 1 for the forward section

- Service interphone 2 for the mid section

- Service interphone 3 for the aft section

Put the service interphone switch on the miscellaneous switch

control module in the ON position to connect the service interphone
with the flight interphone system. This connects the service
interphone jacks with the:

- Flight deck flight interphone jacks

- Nose wheel well control panel flight interphone jack
- Main equipment center flight interphone jack

23.41.0705 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 10
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.41.0205 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 11
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - SERVICE INTERPHONE

SWITCH

When the service interphone switch is in the ON position, it

combines service interphone audio with the flight interphone audio.

23.41.0707 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 12
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.41.0207 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 13
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - JACK AND HEADSET

The service interphone jacks let ground crew connect a headset and
communicate through the service interphone. The jacks are secured
to their mounting location by a nut and washer.

The service interphone headset is a combination boom MIC and

headphone that allows hands free operation.

WARNING: DO NOT WORK ON ENGINE NACELLE INTERPHONE

JACK ON ENGINE WHICH IS TO BE STARTED OR IS
IN OPERATION. PERSONNEL MAY BE INJURED BY
ENGINE INLET SUCTION OR EXHAUST BLAST.

23.41.0708 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 14
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.41.0208 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 15
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - AUDIO MANAGEMENT UNIT

Purpose

The audio management unit (AMU) contains circuits for both the
service and flight interphone systems. Service interphone circuits
consist of amplifiers for input and output audio. Switching is done
based on the input from the miscellaneous control module.

Characteristics

The AMU has the following four circuit card, three crew interface
cards and one general interface card they are the:

- Captain's card
- First officer's card
- First observer's card
- AMU interface card

Service interphone circuits are on the AMU interface card.

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.41.0709 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 16
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.41.0209 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 17
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SERVICE INTERPHONE SYSTEM - SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM

Power

The 28v dc service interphone circuit breaker powers a voltage

regulator in the audio management unit (AMU). The voltage
regulator provides +15v dc for:

- Mic excitations
- The service interphone amplifiers in the AMU

Operations

The three service interphone mic inputs are summed and amplified
in the AMU. The amplified outputs are routed back to the service
interphone jacks through three service interphone audio outputs.
Flight interphone audio is connected with the service interphone
audio when the service interphone switch is in the ON position.

23.41.0710 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 18
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.41.0210 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 19
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Service Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-41

Issue: 1 Page 20
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SELCAL SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION ........................................... 2

SELCAL - GENERAL DESCRIPTION ............................................ 4
SELCAL SYSTEM - COMPONENT LOCATIONS ......................... 6
SELCAL SYSTEM - INTERFACE DIAGRAM ................................ 8
SELCAL SYSTEM - DECODER..................................................... 10
SELCAL SYSTEM - ACP CALL LIGHTS ....................................... 12
SELCAL SYSTEM - CALL/RESET SCHEMATIC .......................... 17
SELCAL SYSTEM - CHIME SCHEMATIC ..................................... 20
SELF-TEST .................................................................................... 23

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 1
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SELCAL SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION

The selcal system lets a ground station alert the flight crew to a
selcal call on one of the communications transceivers. There is a
unique selcal code for each airplane.

23.28.0701 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 2
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.28.0201 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 3
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SELCAL - GENERAL DESCRIPTION

General Indications

Each airplane has a different SELCAL code. A ground station The modularized aural warning electronics assembly (MAWEA)
transmits this code with a signal to contact an airplane. When the makes a chime signal and sends it to the aural warning speakers.
airplane receives its SELCAL code, several flight deck indications
come on to alert the flight crew. The AMU sends a signal to the audio control panels (ACPs). The
ACPs turn on the call light for the transceiver that received the
SELCAL code.
HF and VHF Transceivers
To reset the indications, push the CALL light on the ACP or push the
The HF and VHF communication transceivers send received audio mic switch for the related radio.
to the SELCAL decoder.

23.28.0702 -001

SELCAL Decoder

A SELCAL coding is in the wire integration unit (WIU) and gives

each airplane its SELCAL code.

The SELCAL decoder monitors for audio tones. If the tones are the
same as the code, the decoder sends a signal to the audio
management unit (AMU).

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 4
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.28.0202 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 5
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SELCAL SYSTEM - COMPONENT LOCATIONS

The selcal system components are:

- Selcal circuit breaker

- Selcal decoder

23.28.0703 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 6
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.28.0203 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 7
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SELCAL SYSTEM - INTERFACE DIAGRAM

Power Flight Interphone

The 28v dc bus 3 supplies power to the power supply in the selcal The AMU sends call set data to each audio control panel (ACP) on a
decoder. digital bus. The ACPs send call reset data to the AMU on the same
bus.

Audio There are PTT inputs to the AMU from each ACP and from each
crew member's hand mic. A PTT can reset a selcal call.
The selcal decoder gets audio from the VHF and HF transceivers.

23.28.0704 -002

Discretes

The selcal decoder sends a call set discrete for each of the five
communications radios to the audio management unit (AMU). The
AMU sends a call reset discrete to the selcal decoder for each radio.

The selcal decoder sends a chime request discrete to the

modularized avionics and warning electronics assembly (MAWEA).

A set of 16 program pins puts the airplane code into the selcal
decoder.

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 8
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.28.0204 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 9
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SELCAL SYSTEM - DECODER

The selcal decoder:

- Monitors the audio from the VHF and HF communication

transceivers

- Recognizes receipt of the selcal code assigned to the airplane

- Generates alert signals

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.28.0705 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 10
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.28.0205 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 11
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SELCAL SYSTEM - ACP CALL LIGHTS

A VHF or HF white CALL light comes on to alert flight crew of a

selcal call.

To make a CALL light go off, push the transmit switch on which the
CALL light shows. If MIC already shows for the same transmit switch
on which CALL shows, any PTT (except an INT PTT) resets the
CALL light.

23.28.0706 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 12
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.28.0206 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 13
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 14
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.28.0207 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 15
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 16
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SELCAL SYSTEM - CALL/RESET SCHEMATIC

Power

The power supply in the selcal decoder uses 28v dc. It sends power (AMU). This tells the AMU to show the call lights for left VHF
to the circuits in the decoder. (channel 1) on the audio control panels (ACPs) . Each crew card in
the AMU tells its ACP to show its call light for left VHF. The latch
also energizes S2, which sends a ground discrete to the
Selcal Call Light Set modularized avionics and warning electronics assembly (MAWEA).
This tells MAWEA to send a chime to the flight deck.
The selcal decoder has five input channels. The audio for each
23.28.0708A-002
channel goes to a decoder circuit for that channel. Each decoder
circuit is identical, so the schematic shows the channel 1 decoder
only.

The audio for channel 1, which is from the left VHF transceiver, goes
to 16 audio filter circuits. Each filter circuit is a bandpass circuit
which passes one selcal frequency. All 16 outputs go to every select
circuit. There are four select circuits, one for each selcal letter. Each
select circuit monitors the filter output which corresponds to the
selcal letter represented by its four-bit pin program. When the select
circuit detects a tone, it sets a logic high on its output. Each output
goes to an AND gate. The output of AND gate 1 goes to a delay
circuit, which makes its output stay in logic high for 2 seconds after
its input goes from high to low. The outputs from the delay circuit
and from AND gate 2 go to the input of AND gate 3. The output of
AND gate 3 goes to a latch circuit. The latch energizes a switch
which sends a ground discrete to the audio management unit

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 17
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Selcal CALL Light Reset

To reset the CALL lights, do one of these:

- If the MIC light above the CALL light is off, press the transmit
switch for that call light.

- If the MIC light above the CALL light is on, press a PTT for that
crew member's station.

When there is a reset (by transmit switch or by PTT), the crew

member's card in the AMU sends a reset pulse to the latch in the
selcal decoder. This resets the latch, which causes switch S1 to
open. Thus, the call lights on all ACPs go off.

23.28.0708B-002

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 18
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.28.0208 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 19
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SELCAL SYSTEM - CHIME SCHEMATIC

To request a chime, the selcal decoder sends a ground discrete to

the crew alerting card in the modularized avionics warning and
electronics assembly (MAWEA).

The chime inhibit logic tells the logic circuits not to request a chime if
either of these is true:

- N1 is greater than takeoff thrust and the airplane is on the ground.

- Radio altitude is less than 800 feet and the airplane is in the air.

Thus, selcal chimes do not happen during takeoff and landing. If

there is a logic low from the chime inhibit logic, the logic circuits tell
the aural synthesizer cards to generate a low chime and send it to
the aural warning speakers.

23.28.0709 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 20
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.28.0209 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 21
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 22
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SELF-TEST

Self-test

The SELCAL decoder features a built-in microcomputer controlled

self test. The test routine provides an end-to-end test of the decoder.
The test is started by pressing the front panel test switch. It operates
in six phases as follows:

- Phase 1, turns on all of the front panel LEDs at once for a lamp
test. The LEDs are on for 3 seconds and then go out.

- Phase 2, The indicator LEDs are illuminated one after another as

the microcomputer checks that only the correct LED lights in
response to an internal control code.

- Phase 3, Has no indication to the operator. It checks the

microcomputer multiplier/divider circuits.

- Phase 4, Also has no indication for the operator. The

Micro-Computer forces reset logic levels to the inputs of the reset
driver and checks to see that proper codes are generated.

- Phase 5, Once again has no user indication. The microcomputer

performs read/write checks and memory check-sum tests.

23.21.0503C-015

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 23
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Self-Test (cont)

- Phase 6, Checks operations of the tone detectors. The micro

processor commands the frequency generator to inject the first
SELCAL code tone into channel 1's input. When the first tone is
detected at the Micro-Computer, the second is sent. This process
continues until channel 1 has detected all four tones. Channel 1's
yellow VHF 1 LED is then lit and remains on for the rest of the
test. Phase six continues using channels 2, 3, 4, and 5 in the
same manner as channel 1. The yellow VHF 2, VHF 3, HF 1, and
HF 2 LEDs should light as each channels test is completed.

After the channel 5 test is complete, then either the green GO LED
or the red NOGO LED will light indicating test completion and
acceptability. The test results are held for three seconds and then all
the LED's go out.

23.28.0503D-015

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 24
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.28.0003 -015

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 25
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
SELCAL
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-28

Issue: 1 Page 26
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ADVANCED CABIN ENTERTAINMENT/SERVICE SYSTEM -

INTRODUCTION ...................................................................... 2
ADVANCED CABIN ENTERTAINMENT/SERVICE SYSTEM ....... 6
ACESS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS ........................................... 12
ACESS CONFIGURATION DATABASE ........................................ 18
ACESS - AIRPLANE CONFIGURATION SYSTEM ....................... 20
ACESS - ACS - MAIN MENU ......................................................... 22
ACESS - ACS - EDIT CONFIGURATION MENU........................... 24
ACESS - ACS - BASIC REQUIREMENTS MENU ......................... 26
ACESS - ACS - EQUIPMENT LIST AND CONFIGURATION
SUMMARY ................................................................................. 28
ACESS - ACS - AUDIO CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS ..................... 30
ACESS - ACS - SAVE WORKING CONFIGURATION MENU ....... 32
ACESS - INSTALL ACESS CONFIGURATION DATABASE ......... 34
ACESS - LRU OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE ................................. 36

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 1
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ADVANCED CABIN ENTERTAINMENT/SERVICE SYSTEM -

INTRODUCTION

General Cabin Interphone System

The advanced cabin entertainment/ service system (ACESS) is an Cabin attendants and the flight crew use the cabin interphone
integrated system that contains five subsystems. They are: system (CIS) to communicate with each other. They use handsets
located in the passenger cabin and the flight deck.
- Passenger address
- Cabin interphone
- Passenger entertainment (audio) Passenger Entertainment (Audio) System
- Passenger service
- Cabin lighting The passenger entertainment system (PES) audio system sends
entertainment audio to the passenger headphones.

Passenger Address System

Passenger Service System
Cabin attendants and the flight crew use the passenger address
system (PAS) to communicate with the passengers. The PA audio is The Passenger service system (PSS) controls:
transmitted to:
- Passenger reading lights
- Speakers in the passenger cabin - Attendant call lights and chimes
- Passenger headphones - Passenger information signs.

23.30.0701A-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 2
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Cabin Lighting System

The cabin lighting system (CLS) controls most of the lighting

functions in the airplane.

These include:

- Indirect ceiling lights

- Sidewall wash lights
- Night lights
- Direct ceiling lights

Cabin lighting is an ATA chapter 33 system and is not discussed

further in this lesson.

23.30.0701B-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 3
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 4
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.30.0201 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 5
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ADVANCED CABIN ENTERTAINMENT/SERVICE SYSTEM

General

Sixteen different types of line replaceable units (LRUs) are in the Three ACESS LRUs, called main controllers, control the ACESS
advanced cabin entertainment/service system (ACESS). They are: subsystems. They are the:

- Central management unit (CMU) - Passenger address controller (PAC). The PAC controls the
- Cabin configuration test module (CCTM) passenger address system.
- Cabin interphone controller (CIC)
- Pilot's call panel (PCP) - Cabin interphone controller (CIC). The CIC controls the cabin
- Passenger address controller (PAC) interphone system.
- Entertainment/service controller (ESC)
- Audio entertainment multiplexer (AEM) - Entertainment/service controller (ESC). The ESC controls the
- Local area controllers (LAC) passenger entertainment (audio), passenger service, and cabin
- Cabin interphone handsets (CIH) lighting systems.
- Cabin system modules (CSM)
- Seat electronics units (SEU) The three main controllers send data and/or audio to four local area
- Digital passenger control units (DPCU) controllers (LACs).
- Outboard overhead electronics units (O-OEUs)
23.30.0702A-002
- Inboard overhead electronics units (I-OEUs)
- Passenger address level control sensors (PALCS)
- Speakers

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 6
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

General (cont)

The LACs interface with other ACESS components in the passenger (CIC). The called station gets a high-low chime, and the attendants
zones they are wired to. Each LAC sends data/audio to one or two call light comes on. The passenger address system causes the
passenger zones as follows: chime to sound, and the passenger service system causes the call
light to come on. The attendant at the called station picks up the
- LAC 1 interfaces with zones A and B handset, and the CIC connects the two stations.
- LAC 2 interfaces with zones C and D
- LAC 3 interfaces with zone E Flight crew communication is the same, except the flight crew does
- LAC 4 interfaces with the upper deck. not use a handset. They use flight interphone system headsets and
a pilot's call panel (PCP) to call a station.
The LAC interfaces with:
23.30.0702B-002

- Cabin interphone handsets (CIHs)

- A cabin system module (CSM)
- Seat electronics units (SEUs)
- Outboard overhead electronics units (O-OEUs)
- Inboard overhead electronics units (I-OEUs)

Cabin Interphone System

Cabin attendants and the flight crew use the cabin interphone
system to communicate with each other.

An attendant picks up a cabin interphone handset (CIH) and pushes

the dial code for another station. This causes the code to go through
the local area controller (LAC) to the cabin interphone controller

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 7
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Passenger Address System

23.30.0702C-002

Cabin attendants and the flight crew use the passenger address
system to communicate with the passengers.

The passenger address controller (PAC) gets audio from different

sources. The PAC sends the audio through the LAC to the inboard
overhead electronics units (I-OEUs). The I-OEUs connect to one or
two speakers that transmit the audio to the passenger cabin.

Passenger address level control sensors (PALCS) measure the

cabin noise level and send the information through I-OEUs to a LAC.
The LAC sends commands to the I-OEUs. The I-OEUs adjust the
passenger address volume in the area where the PALCS is located.

Passenger Entertainment (Audio) System

The passenger entertainment (audio) system (PES audio) sends

entertainment audio to the passenger headphones. The audio
entertainment multiplexer (AEM) gets audio from an entertainment
tape reproducer. The audio changes to digital audio and goes to the
entertainment/service controller (ESC). The ESC sends the digital
audio to the local area controllers (LACs). The LACs send the audio
to the seat electronics units (SEUs). Passengers set channel and
volume selections on a digital passenger control unit (DPCU). The
SEU gets the selections from the DPCU, changes the digital audio to
analog audio, and sends it to the headphone.

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 8
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Passenger Service System The LAC:

The passenger service system (PSS) - Makes a master call light at the attendants station come on.
controls: - Sends a call light command to the I-OEUs or O-OEUs. The OEU
makes the row call light above the seat come on.
- Passengers reading lights - Sends a chime command to the ESC. The ESC sends the chime
- Passengers to attendant calls command to the passenger address system. The passenger
- Passenger information signs address system sounds a high chime at the attendants station.

Passengers use digital passenger control units (DPCUs) to: Discrete inputs to the ESC cause the passenger information signs to
go on or off. The ESC sends a command through the LAC to the
- Control reading lights O-OEUs and I-OEUs. The OEUs make the passenger information
- Call attendants signs go on or off.

Reading light on/off selection goes to the SEU and then to the LAC.
The LAC sends the selection to an inboard or outboard overhead Cabin System Module
electronics unit (I-OEU or O-OEU). The OEU makes the reading
light go on or off. Use the cabin system module (CSM) to control the:

Passenger to attendant call commands go to the SEU, and then to - Passenger entertainment (audio) system
the LAC. - Passenger service system
- Cabin lighting system

23.30.0702D-002

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 9
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Test

The cabin configuration test module (CCTM) gives control of system The software is stored on floppy disks. To program ACESS, put the
test. Use the CCTM to start a test of a single ACESS subsystem or floppy disk into a software data loader. The software goes through
of all subsystems together. The CCTM sends a test command to the the software data loader panel to the CMU. The CMU stores the
central management unit (CMU), to start the test. Test results go to software. Use the CCTM to command the CMU to program the other
the CMU and then to the CCTM. When the test finds a failure, the ACESS LRUs.
CCTM shows the failed component and its location.
23.30.0702E-002

Monitor

During normal operation, the CMU sends status information to the

EFIS/EICAS interface units (EIUs). If a failure occurs, the EIUs:

- Generate a status message for main controller failures.

- Send failure information to the central maintenance computer

system (CMCS). The CMCS shows CMCS fault messages.

Program

ACESS is programmed with two types of software. They are the:

- ACESS configuration database

- LRU operational software

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 10
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.30.0202 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 11
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ACESS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS

The major ACESS components and their locations are:

- Local area controller (LAC) 1 and 2: Door 2 left overhead liferaft

box

- Local area controller 3: STA 1500, WL 330, RBL 45

- Local area controller 4: Door 2 right overhead liferaft box

- Cabin configuration test module (CCTM): Door 2 right

- Overhead electronics units (OEU): Every other passenger

service unit and in each lavatory

- Seat electronics units (SEU): Every seat group

- Cabin interphone controller (CIC): E2-5

- Passenger address controller (PAC): E2-5

- Entertainment/service controller (ESC): E2-5

- Central management unit (CMU): E2-5

23.30.0703 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 12
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.30.0203 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 13
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 14
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.30.0204 -005

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 15
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 16
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.30.0205 -006

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 17
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ACESS CONFIGURATION DATABASE

Purpose

The configuration database is software that controls the operation of

ACESS. The database customizes ACESS for an airplane's cabin
layout. Many ACESS components have a non-volatile memory
which stores part of the configuration database. If an airline changes
its passenger cabin layout, the configuration database must also
change.

23.30.0706 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 18
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.30.0206 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 19
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ACESS - AIRPLANE CONFIGURATION SYSTEM

Purpose

The airplane configuration system (ACS) lets the airline make

changes to the ACESS configuration database.

General Description

ACS is a software program for use on an IBM (or compatible)

personal computer.

When there is a change to the airplane's cabin layout, use ACS to

change the ACESS configuration database. ACS puts the new
configuration database onto a floppy disk. Maintenance persons
then take the disk onto the airplane and install the database into
ACESS.

Usually, line maintenance persons do not use ACS.

23.30.0707 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 20
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.30.0207 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 21
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ACESS - ACS - MAIN MENU

The airplane configuration system (ACS) is a menu-driven system. It

shows menus that list the available selections.

There are six selections available in the ACS main menu. Use the
computer keyboard to enter your selection. In the example, number
two (2) is selected. Push the return key to show the edit selected
configuration menu.

23.30.0708 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 22
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.30.0208 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 23
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ACESS - ACS - EDIT CONFIGURATION MENU

There are nine (9) selections available in the edit configuration

menu. Use the computer keyboard to enter your selection. In the
example, number one (1) is selected. Push the return key to show
the ACESS basic requirements menu.

23.30.0709 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 24
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.30.0209 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 25
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ACESS - ACS - BASIC REQUIREMENTS MENU

The ACESS basic requirements menu has eight selections. Use the
computer keyboard to enter your selection. In the example, number
one (1) is selected. Push the return key to show the equipment list
and configuration summary menu.

23.30.0710 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 26
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.30.0210 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 27
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ACESS - ACS - EQUIPMENT LIST AND CONFIGURATION

SUMMARY

The equipment list and configuration summary menu is shown. This

menu shows the number of:

- Local area controllers (LACs) installed

- Cabin system modules (CSMs) installed
- Galley panels installed (galley panels are not used at this time)
- Seat electronics units (SEUs) and overhead electronics units
(I-OEUs and O-OEUs) installed in each column for each LAC
- Passenger address area assigned to each LAC

For example, if a cabin system module is added to your airplane,

then the ACESS configuration database should change to reflect
this.

23.30.0711 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 28
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.30.0211 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 29
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ACESS - ACS - AUDIO CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS

Use the audio channel assignments menu to set the entertainment

tape reproducer (ENT T/R) input that goes to the passenger
headphones for each digital passenger control unit (DPCU) channel
selection.

For example, the audio channel assignments in this graphic give

these selections:

- Select DPCU channel one to hear ENT T/R input number one
(monaural).

- Select DPCU channel five to hear ENT T/R input numbers seven
and nine (stereo pair).

- Select DPCU channel six to hear ENT T/R input number nine
(monaural).

23.30.0712 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 30
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.30.0212 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 31
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ACESS - ACS - SAVE WORKING CONFIGURATION MENU

Use the save working configuration menu to save changes to the

ACESS configuration database.

Use selection one (1) of this menu to save the database in ACS
format. This saves the ACESS configuration database on the PC's
hard disk.

Use selection two (2) of this menu to save the database in ACS
format and in the data loader format. This saves the ACESS
configuration database on the PC's hard disk and on a floppy disk.
The floppy disk is formatted for use with a software data loader.

23.30.0713 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 32
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.30.0213 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 33
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ACESS - INSTALL ACESS CONFIGURATION DATABASE

After the ACESS configuration database is saved on a floppy disk,

take the floppy disk to the airplane and install the database into the
ACESS system. Use a software data loader to do this.

23.30.0714 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 34
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.30.0214 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 35
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ACESS - LRU OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE

General

LRU operational software is software that controls an LRUs

operation. If an LRUs operation needs to change, then that LRUs
operational software must change. The ACESS vendor changes an
LRU's operational software to:

- Correct an LRU's problems

- Give an LRU more functions

General Description

The vendor sends the airline a floppy disk that contains the changed
LRU operational software. Maintenance persons use a software data
loader, on the airplane, to install LRU operational software into these
LRUs:

- Passenger address controller

- Cabin interphone controller
- Entertainment/service controller
- Central management unit
- Local area controller (Boeing part number S22OU004-604 and
later)

23.30.0715 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 36
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.30.0215 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 37
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
ACESS Introduction
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-30

Issue: 1 Page 38
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CABIN INTERPHONE SYSTEM .................................................... 4 CIS - SPECIAL FUNCTIONS ......................................................... 59

CABIN INTERPHONE SYSTEM .................................................... 7 CIS - FLIGHT DECK CALLS STORAGE ....................................... 62
CIS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - FLIGHT DECK ...................... 10 CIS - AURAL SIGNALS.................................................................. 64
CIS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - MAIN EQUIPMENT CIS - DIAL TONE ........................................................................... 66
CENTER .................................................................................... 12 CIS - RING BACK .......................................................................... 68
CIS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - CABIN - 1 .............................. 14 CIS - TYPE 1 BUSY SIGNAL ......................................................... 70
CIS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - CABIN - 2 .............................. 16 CIS - TYPE 2 BUSY SIGNAL ......................................................... 72
CIS - POWER INTERFACE ........................................................... 20 CIS - SIDETONE ............................................................................ 74
CIS - LAC INTERFACES ............................................................... 22 CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - CALL TO FLIGHT DECK ............... 76
CIS - CABIN INTERPHONE CONTROLLER INTERFACE ............ 24 CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - CALL FROM FLIGHT DECK ......... 78
CIS - CABIN INTERPHONE HANDSET ........................................ 26 CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - DIRECTORY.................................. 80
CIS - CABIN INTERPHONE PANEL .............................................. 28 CIS - PILOT CALL PANEL - PASSENGER ADDRESS IN
CIS - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER .............................................. 30 USE-1 ......................................................................................... 82
CIS - CABIN INTERPHONE CONTROLLER ................................. 32 CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - PASSENGER ADDRESS IN
CIS - ATTENDANT CALL LIGHTS ................................................. 34 USE-2 ......................................................................................... 84
CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL .......................................................... 36 CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - VIDEO IN USE ............................... 86
CIS - AUDIO CONTROL PANEL ................................................... 38 CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - MESSAGE CONTROL .................. 88
CIS - CABIN CONFIGURATION TEST MODULE.......................... 40 CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - STORED CALL SCROLL .............. 90
CIS - TYPES OF CALLS ................................................................ 42 CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - MESSAGE STORAGE AND
CIS - PILOT ALERT CALL ............................................................. 44 PRIORITY .................................................................................. 93
CIS - ALL CALL .............................................................................. 47 CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - PILOT ALERT ................................ 96
CIS - PRIORITY LINE CALLS ........................................................ 50 CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL OPERATION .................................... 100
CIS - ATTENDANT'S ALL CALL .................................................... 52 CIS - CABIN INTERPHONE HANDSET OPERATION .................. 102
CIS - NORMAL STATION-TO-STATION CALLS ........................... 54 CIS - CABIN INTERPHONE CONTROLLER NORMAL AND
CIS - DIAL CODES ........................................................................ 56 ALTERNATE CIRCUITS ............................................................ 104

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 1
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - CABIN INTERPHONE CONTROLLER OPERATION ........... 106

CIS - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER OPERATION ........................ 111
CIS - PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES ........................................... 115

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 2
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 3
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CABIN INTERPHONE SYSTEM

The cabin interphone system (CIS) is a communication system

which connects attendant stations with:

- The flight deck

- Other attendant stations

The cabin interphone system is part of the advanced cabin

entertainment and service system (ACESS).

23.42.0701 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 4
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0201 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 5
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 6
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CABIN INTERPHONE SYSTEM

Attendant to Flight Deck Calls

General Description
When an attendant calls the flight deck, the dial code goes through
The cabin interphone system (CIS) lets the attendants communicate the LAC to the CIC. The CIC then causes:
with:
- The modularized avionics and warning electronics assembly
- Other attendants (MAWEA) to sound a chime in the flight deck
- The flight crew
- The PCP to show a message
Attendants use the cabin interphone handsets (CIHs) to call other
attendants or the flight deck. There is a CIH at each attendant - The CAB INT call light on the audio control panels (ACPs) to
station. The flight crew uses the pilots' call panel (PCP) to call an come on
attendant station. To talk with the attendant at the station, the pilots
use the flight interphone system. When the pilot takes the FDH off-hook, the CIC connects the call so
that the attendant can talk with the pilot. The pilot can also use the
flight interphone system to talk with the attendant.
Attendant to Attendant Calls
23.42.0702A-002

To make a call, an attendant enters a dial code at the CIH. This code
goes through tthe local area controller (LAC) to the cabin interphone
controller (CIC). The CIC tells the passenger address controller
(PAC) to sound a chime at the called attendant station. The CIC also
tells the LAC tolight a call light at the called attendant station. When
an attendant at the called station takes the CIH out of its holder, the
CIH is active (the CIH goes off-hook). When this occurs, the CIC
connects the two CIHs so that the attendants can talk to each other.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 7
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Flight Deck to Attendant Calls Ground Crew Call

To call an attendant station, the pilot enters a dial code on the PCP. To call the ground crew, the flight crew enters the ground crew call
This causes a chime to sound and a call light to come on at the dial code on the PCP. This causes the horn on the nose wheel well
attendant station. The pilot then talks to the attendant with the FDH to sound.
or through the flight interphone system.

Video In Use
Normal/Alternate Circuit
The PCP shows VIDEO IN USE when the video system is on.
The CIC has these two fully redundant circuits:

23.42.0702B-002
- Normal
- Alternate

Each circuit can do all CIC functions. Usally, the normal circuit is on.
If the normal circuit becomes defective, the CCTM has a switch
which can make the alternate circuit come on.

Passenger Address Announcements

When an attendant enters a passenger address dial code on a CIH,

the CIC sends the audio from the CIH to the PAC. The CIC also tells
the PAC the area for the announcement. The passenger address
system sends the audio to the speakers in that area.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 8
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0202 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 9
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - FLIGHT DECK

These components are in the flight deck:

- Pilots' call panel

- Interphone cabin circuit breaker

23.42.0703 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 10
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0203 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 11
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - MAIN EQUIPMENT CENTER

The cabin interphone controller is in the main equipment center.

23.42.0704 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 12
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0204 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 13
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - CABIN - 1

These components are in the passenger cabin:

- Local Area Controller 1

- Local Area Controller 2
- Local Area Controller 3
- Local Area Controller 4

23.42.0705 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 14
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0205 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 15
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - CABIN - 2

These components are in the passenger cabin:

- Cabin interphone handsets (on cabin interphone panels)

- Cabin configuration test module (CCTM)

23.42.0706 -008

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 16
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0206 -008

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 17
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 18
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0207 -005

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 19
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - POWER INTERFACE

The cabin interphone circuit breaker sends 28v dc to the cabin

interphone controller (CIC) and the local area controllers. The CIC
sends 28v dc to the pilots' call panel.

23.42.0708 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 20
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0208 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 21
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - LAC INTERFACES

General Description

The local area controllers (LACs) have interfaces with up to five LAC 3 has interfaces with stations at:
attendant stations. Each attendant station has:
- Door 4 left
- Cabin interphone handset (CIH) - Door 4 right
- Attendant call light - Door 5 left
- Door 5 right

Interfaces LAC 4 has interfaces with stations at:

LAC 1 has interfaces with stations at: - Left upper deck door
- Right upper deck door
- Door 1 left - Upper deck galley
- Door 1 right
23.42.0709 -008
- Door 2 galley
- Purser's station

LAC 2 has interfaces with stations at:

- Door 2 left
- Door 2 right
- Door 3 left
- Door 3 right
- Door 4 galley

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 22
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0209 -008

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 23
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - CABIN INTERPHONE CONTROLLER INTERFACE

The cabin interphone controller (CIC) has interfaces with these cabin
interphone system (CIS) components:

- Pilots' call panel (PCP)

- Cabin configuration and test module (CCTM)
- Local area controllers (LACs)

The CIC has interfaces for CIS with the:

- Audio Management Unit (AMU)

- Modularized avionics and warning electronics assembly (MAWEA)
- Passenger address controller (PAC)
- Video system control unit (VSCU)

The CIC has interfaces for functions that are not part of CIS with:

- Entertainment/service controller (ESC)

- Ground crew call system

23.42.0710 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 24
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0210 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 25
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - CABIN INTERPHONE HANDSET

Purpose

The cabin interphone handsets (CIHs) let the attendants use the
cabin interphone system and make announcements through the
passenger address system.

General Description

There are seven dial code buttons on each cabin interphone

handset. Use these buttons to dial two-digit station codes. Use the
button labeled R to end a call. Use the PTT buttons only for
passenger address announcements.

An electrical cord connects the cabin interphone handset to the

cabin interphone panel.

23.42.0711 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 26
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0211 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 27
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - CABIN INTERPHONE PANEL

Purpose

The cabin interphone panels hold the cabin interphone handsets

(CIHs). When a CIH is in its holder, it is in the on-hook condition.

General Description

Each cabin interphone panel has an electrical connector which

connects the cabin interphone handset to the airplane wiring. Four
screws hold the cabin interphone panel in place.

There is a magnet in the cabin interphone panel. This magnet

removes power from the CIH microphone line when the handset is in
the holder (on-hook).

23.42.0712 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 28
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0212 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 29
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER

Purpose

The local area controller (LAC) is a multiplexer/demultiplexer which There are eight connectors labeled J1 through J8. There are no
connects the cabin interphone controller (CIC) with up to five cabin external controls or indicators.
interphone handsets (CIHs) and 10 attendant call lights.
The LAC needs the configuration database to operate correctly.

General Description CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
A LAC gets analog audio and digital dial codes from the cabin ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
interphone handsets. It multiplexes these signals and sends them to (REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
the cabin interphone controller (CIC). BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.42.0713 -001
The LAC gets digital data from the cabin interphone controller. This
data has digital audio and call connection data. The LAC converts
the digital audio from the cabin interphone controller into analog
audio. It sends the analog audio to the correct cabin interphone
handset. It also makes the correct attendant call lights come on.

Characteristics

The dimensions of the local area controller are:

- Length: 10 inches
- Width: 8.75 inches
- Height: 4.5 inches

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 30
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0213 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 31
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - CABIN INTERPHONE CONTROLLER

Characteristics
Purpose
The cabin interphone controller is three MCU (modular concept unit)
The cabin interphone controller (CIC) is the central digital in size.
multiplexer/ demultiplexer for the cabin interphone system (CIS). All
CIS calls go through the CIC. The CIC needs the configuration database to operate correctly.

There are two fully redundant circuits inside the cabin interphone
General Description controller:

The cabin interphone controller (CIC): - Normal

- Alternate
- Sends a dial tone to a handset when it is removed from its holder.
Only one of the circuits is on at a time.
- Senses and decodes dial codes from the cabin interphone
handsets and the pilots' call panel. CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
- Alerts a station of a call. To do this, it tells the local area ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
controllers to make the appropriate attendant call light come on, (REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
and tells the passenger address controller to sound a chime in BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.
the called station area.

23.42.0715 -001
- Makes all digital connections between stations.

- Stores up to four flight deck call messages and sends them to the
pilots' call panel.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 32
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0215 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 33
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - ATTENDANT CALL LIGHTS

There is a pink attendant call light at each attendant station that has
a cabin interphone handset. It comes on when the station gets a
cabin interphone call.

23.42.0716 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 34
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0216 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 35
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL

Purpose
When there is more than one flight deck call, push NXT to cause the
The pilots' call panel (PCP): display to show the next call message in memory (up to a maximum
of four).
- Lets the flight crew dial cabin interphone calls
When there are no flight deck calls, push NXT to show the directory
- Shows calls to the flight deck on the display of the station dial codes.

- Shows a complete directory with all possible two-digit dial codes Push the RST button to stop any call from the flight deck. Put the
flight deck handset on-hook to do the same thing.

Characteristics CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
The PCP has a 16-character LED display and 9 momentary buttons. ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
An external light sensor monitors ambient light in the flight deck. The BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.
input from the ambient light sensor controls the display brightness.
23.42.0718 -001

General Operation

Use buttons one through six and P to dial two-digit station codes on
the cabin interphone system.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 36
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0218 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 37
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - AUDIO CONTROL PANEL

Purpose

The audio control panel lets the flight crew make the cabin CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
interphone calls with the flight interphone system. READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
General Description BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

When there is a call to the flight deck, the cabin interphone call light
23.42.0719 -001
on the cabin interphone switch comes on. Answer the call to make
the call light go off.

Push the cabin interphone receiver control to send audio from the
cabin interphone system to the flight deck speakers and headsets.
Rotate the same knob to adjust the volume of the audio.

Push the cabin interphone microphone selector switch to connect

the flight deck microphone associated with that audio control panel
to the cabin interphone system.

Push the cabin interphone microphone selector switch twice within

three seconds to connect the flight deck microphone to the cabin
interphone system and automatically dial the primary attendant
station.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 38
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0219 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 39
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - CABIN CONFIGURATION TEST MODULE

General Description

For the cabin interphone system (CIS), the cabin configuration test Push the CABIN INTERPHONE switch to:
module (CCTM) has switches to:
- Make the alternate circuit come on
- Do a CIS test
- Make the normal circuit go off
- Install the configuration database
- Make a light in the switch come on
- Install operational software
When this occurs, the alternate circuit does all CIC functions.
- Make the alternate circuit in the cabin interphone controller (CIC)
come on CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
Normal/Alternate Circuit Selection (REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.
The CCTM has a cabin interphone alternate system switch. The
23.42.0720 -001
switch sends a discrete to the CIC to make either the normal or the
alternate controller circuit come on. Usually, the normal circuit in the
CIC is on.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 40
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0220 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 41
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - TYPES OF CALLS

These are the types of cabin interphone calls in order of priority:

- Pilot alert call

- All call
- Priority line call
- Attendant's all call
- Normal station-to-station call

23.42.0721 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 42
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0221 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 43
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - PILOT ALERT CALL

The pilot alert call comes from any attendant station to the flight
deck. It uses code PP. This call overrides all other calls to the flight
deck except when one of these conditions exists:

- There is another pilot alert call.

- The flight deck is on a passenger address announcement.

23.42.0722 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 44
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0222 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 45
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 46
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - ALL CALL

General

An all call can come from any attendant station and the flight deck. It all call. If the all call stops before the passenger address
uses code 55. This type of call calls all stations. It connects all announcement stops, the flashing attendant call lights go off.
handsets on a common line when they go off-hook.

When there is an all call: Flight Crew Using Passenger Address

- The message ALL CALL shows on the pilots' call panel. If the flight crew is on a passenger address announcement when
there is an all call:
- A low chime sounds in the flight deck.
- The message ALL CALL shows on the pilots' call panel.
- A high/low chime and flashing attendant call lights occur at all
attendant stations. - A low chime sounds.

As each handset is picked up, including the flight deck handset, they - The flight deck does not connect to the all call.
connect into a common line.
23.42.0723A-001

Attendant On Passenger Address

If an attendant is on a passenger address (PA) announcement when

there is an all call, that station shows a flashing attendant call light. It
does not connect to the all call. If the all call is still in progress when
the attendant station stops its passenger address announcement,
the attendant station automatically connects into the

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 47
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Flight Crew Using Passenger Address (cont)

If the all call is still in progress when the flight crew stops its
passenger address announcement, it automatically connects to the
all call.

Pilot Alert Call

If an attendant station is on a pilot alert call, the all call does not put
the flight deck or the station on all call. The attendant station in the
pilot alert call gets:

- A high/low chime
- A flashing attendant call light

For the flight deck, the all call is prioritized in the cabin interphone
controller's memory. If there is an all call when the pilot alert call
stops, the flight deck and the station included in the pilot alert
connect to the all call.

23.42.0723B-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 48
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0223 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 49
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - PRIORITY LINE CALLS

General

The advanced cabin entertainment service system (ACESS) The dialing code for use by the primary station and the secondary
configuration database sets one of the attendant stations as the station is 32. The primary station and the secondary station can use
primary station and another as the secondary station. it to access the priority line.

When any two stations are on the priority line and the third one
Priority Lines pushes its priority line code, it connects into a party line with the two
stations that were on the priority line.
The priority line calls are special priority connections between the:
A station that calls one of the stations on a priority line call gets a
- Flight deck and the primary station busy signal. The exception is a higher priority call such as a pilot
alert or an all call.
- Primary station and the secondary station
23.42.0724 -001

- Flight deck, primary station, and secondary station

The dial code for use by the flight deck and the primary station is 33.
They use this code to access the priority line.

The flight crew can push the CAB microphone selector switch twice
within 3 seconds to access the priority line. This automatically rings
the primary station. The flight crew can use the flight deck
microphones to communicate.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 50
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0224 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 51
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - ATTENDANT'S ALL CALL

An attendant's all call uses dial code 54. It is lower in priority than
priority line calls. An attendant's all call is the same as an all call
except that it does not include the flight deck.

23.42.0725 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 52
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0225 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 53
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - NORMAL STATION-TO-STATION CALLS

The cabin interphone controller (CIC) connects all normal

station-to-station calls in the order in which it gets them. No normal
station-to-station call can override any other call.

When there is a normal station- to-station call to the flight deck:

- The call location shows on the pilots' call panel

- A low chime occurs in the flight deck.

When there is a normal station-to- station call to an attendant

station:

- A high/low chime occurs at the called station

- A non-flashing attendant call light comes on at the called station

23.42.0726 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 54
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0226 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 55
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - DIAL CODES

23.42.0727 -008

Each attendant station and the flight deck has a dial code. Special
function codes that are not assigned to a particular station are also
available.

The cabin interphone controller stores all the codes and their
locations. All dial codes have two digits. Use the codes at the pilots'
call panel (PCP) or at the cabin interphone handsets (CIHs).

Codes 32 and 33 are for the priority line.

Codes 41 through 4P are for passenger address announcements.

Code 54 is for attendant all calls. Use it to call all attendant stations
at the same time from any attendant station.

Code 55 is for all calls. Use it to call all stations at the same time
from any station.

Code 6P (cabin ready) is for use by any attendant station. It gives a

signal to the flight deck.

Code PP is for pilot alert. Attendants can use it to alert the flight
crew.

Code P1 is for use by the flight deck only. It activates the ground
crew call horn in the nose wheel well.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 56
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0227 -008

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 57
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 58
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - SPECIAL FUNCTIONS

Party Lines Call Transfer

A party line occurs when three or more stations connect into a single To transfer a call to another station, dial that station code and reset
communication line. the cabin interphone handset. This function is only available at the
attendant stations.
Up to four party lines are available on the cabin interphone system.
23.42.0728A-001
Each party line can connect up to four stations. When two stations
are on a call and another station calls one of them, no visual
indications occur, but a high/low chime occurs at the called station.
The station that called then connects with the other two stations.

A party line can also occur when one station dials more than one
dial code. In this case, a high/low chime occurs and the attendant
call lights at the called stations come on.

To get into a party line, the flight crew can call a station that is on a
call with three or fewer stations.

Only the flight deck, the primary station, and the secondary station
can access the priority line.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 59
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Remote Answering

Push the code of another station to answer a call to that station.

When the call connects, the attendant call light at the called station
goes off and that station can then get another call. This function is
only available at the attendant stations.

Cabin Ready

When the code 6P is dialed from any attendant station, the message
CABIN READY shows on the pilots' call panel and a low chime
occurs.

23.42.0728B-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 60
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0228 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 61
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - FLIGHT DECK CALLS STORAGE

General

For calls to the flight deck the cabin interphone controller: The messages and accompanying high chime stored by the cabin
interphone controller are put into this priority:
- Stores messages to the flight deck
- Pilot alert calls
- Prioritizes messages to the flight deck - All calls
- Primary station priority
- Controls messages to the flight deck. - Flight deck calls (dialing code 31)

Message Storage Message Control

The cabin interphone controller stores up to four flight deck calls. The cabin interphone controller sends display information to the
pilots' call panel to show that there are messages stored.
This function tells the flight crew the location of calls to the flight
23.42.0729 -001
deck while the flight crew is on an equal or higher priority call. This is
so that the calls can be returned. The calls get a busy signal. The
flight crew gets a message on the pilots' call panel. This tells them
the location of the calls attempted when they were on another call.
When the caller gets a busy 1 signal the caller hangs up and waits
for the pilot to call. Message Priority

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 62
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0229 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 63
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - AURAL SIGNALS

The cabin interphone system sends aural signals to the handset

user. They tell the user the state of a call. These signals go to all
handsets:

- Dial tone
- Ring back
- Type 1 busy signal
- Type 2 busy signal
- Sidetone

23.42.0730 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 64
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0230 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 65
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - DIAL TONE

A dial tone goes to a handset when it goes off-hook and there are no
calls to that station. The dial tone signal is a continuous sound which
is a sum of two tones with frequencies of 350 and 440 Hertz.

23.42.0731 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 66
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0231 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 67
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - RING BACK

A ring back signal goes to a station when a person at that station

calls another station and the handset at the called station is on-hook.

The ring back signal is a sound which is the sum of two tones of
frequencies 440 and 480 Hertz. The sound is on for 2 seconds and
off for 4 seconds, then repeats.

23.42.0732 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 68
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0232 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 69
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - TYPE 1 BUSY SIGNAL

The type 1 busy signal is the sum of two tones with frequencies of
480 and 620 Hertz. The sound is on for 0.5 seconds and off for 0.5
seconds, then repeats.

A type 1 busy signal goes to a station when:

- An attendant or flight crew member tries to call a station which

has its handset off-hook but is not on a call.

- An attendant tries to call a station, and the called station is on a

call with higher priority. Higher priority calls are pilot alert call, all
call, attendant all call, and passenger address announcements.

- An attendant or flight crew member tries to call a station that is on

a full party line (four stations).

- An attendant tries to call the flight deck while the flight deck is on
call of the same or higher priority.

23.42.0733 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 70
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0233 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 71
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - TYPE 2 BUSY SIGNAL

The type 2 busy signal is a sound which is the sum of two tones of - An attendant or flight crew member tries to dial a code for which
frequencies 480 and 620 Hertz. The sound comes on for 0.25 own station is not configured.
seconds and goes off for 0.25 seconds, then repeats.
- Flight crew or attendant tries to dial a code that is not in the
A type 2 busy signal goes to a station when: directory.

- A caller dials own station code. - Flight crew or attendant tries to dial an unusable code.

23.42.0734 -001
- A higher priority call stops another call.

- An attendant tries to call a station number that starts with P

(except pilot alert calls).

- Flight crew dials 6P (cabin ready).

- Flight crew tries to access the secondary station priority line

(code 32).

- An attendant or flight crew member tries to dial a passenger

address code when they are in a station-to-station or party line
connection.

- An attendant or flight crew member tries to make a call while on a

full party line.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 72
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0234 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 73
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - SIDETONE

Sidetone goes to the flight deck when the cabin interphone system
or the passenger address system is on in the flight deck. Sidetone
goes to a cabin interphone handset only when it is on a cabin
interphone call.

23.42.0735 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 74
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0235 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 75
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - CALL TO FLIGHT DECK

When there is a call to the flight deck, a low chime occurs in the
flight deck and the station location shows on the pilots' call panel
(PCP).

An example is a call to the flight deck from the door 2 right attendant
station.

23.42.0736 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 76
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0236 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 77
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - CALL FROM FLIGHT DECK

To make a call, push the station dial code on the pilots' call panel
(PCP). A call to door 2 left is an example.

When the flight deck calls door 2 left (dial code 12):

- A high/low chime occurs at the door 2 left attendant station.

- The call light at door 2 comes on continuously.

When the station goes off-hook, the message DOOR 2 LEFT shows
on the PCP display.

To stop the call, the flight crew member pushes the RST pushbutton.
It causes the message DIRECTORY to show on the PCP.

23.42.0737 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 78
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0237 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 79
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - DIRECTORY

The pilots' call panel (PCP) can show a complete directory of all dial
codes available to the flight crew. The cabin interphone controller
(CIC) stores the directory. To scroll through the directory:

- Push the RST button on the PCP. This resets the PCP display
and causes the message DIRECTORY to show.

- Push the NXT button. This causes the GND CREW CALL P1
message to show. This is the first dial code in the directory.

Each push of the NXT button causes the display to show the next
dial code in the directory in this order:

- Dial codes that start with P

- Dial codes that start with 4
- Dial codes that start with 5
- Dial codes that start with 3
- Dial codes that start with 6
- Dial codes that start with 1
- Dial codes that start with 2

Push the NXT button at the end of the directory to go back to the
start of the directory.

23.42.0738 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 80
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0238 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 81
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - PILOT CALL PANEL - PASSENGER ADDRESS IN USE-1

When the passenger address system is in use, the message PA IN

USE shows on the pilots' call panel (PCP) display. Push the RST
button on the PCP to cause the DIRECTORY message to show.
Then push the NXT button to scroll through the directory.

23.42.0739 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 82
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0239 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 83
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - PASSENGER ADDRESS IN USE-2

When there is a passenger address announcement, the message

PA IN USE shows on the pilots' call panel (PCP) display. This
message shows as long as the passenger address system is in use.

23.42.0740 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 84
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0240 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 85
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - VIDEO IN USE

The pilots' call panel (PCP) shows the message VIDEO IN USE
when the video system is in use in any passenger cabin area.

When there is no call to or from the flight deck for more than five
minutes, the PCP display is blank. If a flight crew member decides to
make a call, the message VIDEO IN USE shows on the display after
the flight crew member pushes the first digit of the dial code.

For example, when the flight crew member pushes the second digit
of the dial code for door 1 left (code 11), the message DOOR 1
LEFT shows on the PCP display. The call to door 1 left occurs as
usual.

The flight crew member pushes the RST button on the PCP to stop
the call. If the video system stays in use, the message VIDEO IN
USE shows on the PCP. The PCP display goes blank after five
minutes, or when the video system goes off.

23.42.0741 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 86
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0241 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 87
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - MESSAGE CONTROL

The cabin interphone controller (CIC) can store up to four flight deck When the pilot alert call is over, a low chime occurs in the flight deck
call messages. The pilots' call panel (PCP) shows them. If there are and the message PRIORITY >33 shows on the PCP. This tells the
four messages stored in the CIC, and there is a higher priority call to flight crew that there was a priority line call, and to use code 33 to
the flight deck (but is lower in priority than the call that the flight deck return the call. When the flight deck calls back, the message
is on), the CIC stores the higher priority call. The last call in storage PRIORITY W3 shows on the PCP. Thus, the crew knows that there
goes out of memory. are three calls in storage.

For example: the flight deck is on a pilot alert call and there are four
23.42.0742 -001
calls stored in memory by the CIC, the messages stored are in this
order:

- Door 2 left
- Door 4 left
- Door 5 right
- Door 3 right

Assume that door 1 left is the primary station. The attendant at that
station dials a priority line code to the flight deck. This call has a
higher priority than all the calls stored by the CIC. Therefore, the last
stored call goes out of the memory, and the priority line call is put
first among the stored calls.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 88
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0242 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 89
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - STORED CALL SCROLL

The cabin interphone controller (CIC) stores and prioritizes up to When the flight crew member stops the call to door 4 left, a low
four calls to the flight deck. It is possible to scroll through the stored chime occurs in the flight deck, and the message U/D GALLEY >56
flight deck calls. shows on the PCP. This is the first call stored by the cabin
interphone controller. The > character indicates that this is a stored
For example: if door 4 left calls the flight deck, a low chime occurs, call.
and the message DOOR 4 LEFT shows on the pilots' call panel
(PCP). To scroll through the stored calls, push the NXT button. Push the
NXT button after all the stored calls are shown to cause the PCP
While the flight crew member talks with door 4 left, there are four display to go back to the top of the list.
calls to the flight deck. They all get type 1 busy signals, but the CIC
stores the locations of the calls in the order received. In this
23.42.0743 -001
example, the calls tried are in this order:

- Upper deck galley (code 56)

- Door 5 right (code 25)
- Door 3 right (code 22)
- Door 3 left (code 13)
- Door 1 left (code 11)

The CIC cannot store more than four calls, so door 1 left does not go
into its memory. As the CIC stores and prioritizes the calls, the
character W shows on the right side of the PCP display along with
the number of stored calls. Thus, when the CIC stores the four calls,
the right side of the PCP display shows the characters W4.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 90
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0243 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 91
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 92
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - MESSAGE STORAGE AND

PRIORITY

The cabin interphone controller (CIC) can store four call messages. While the message DOOR 1 RIGHT >21 shows, there is a call from
The stored calls show on the pilots' call panel (PCP). the upper deck galley. The PCP display does not show this condition
at this time.
For example: a call from door 5 left goes to the flight deck; this
causes a low chime in the flight deck, and the message DOOR 5 Because there is a message from door 1 right, the flight crew
LEFT shows on the PCP. member decides to call door 1 right (code 21). An attendant picks up
the cabin interphone handset (CIH) at that location. The PCP now
A flight crew member picks up the flight deck handset or connects shows the message DOOR 1 RIGHT W2. This means that there are
the flight deck microphone and headset to the cabin interphone two calls in memory.
system with the audio control panel.

23.42.0744A-001
Two calls come to the flight deck while the flight crew member
communicates with door 5 left. One call is from door 1 right and the
other from door 2 left. The CIC stores both calls in the order
received. Therefore, W2 shows on the right side of the PCP display.
This tells the flight crew that there were two attempted calls while
they used the cabin interphone system.

It also means that they are in the memory of the CIC. When the call
from door 5 left stops, a low chime sounds in the flight deck and the
message DOOR 1 RIGHT >21 shows on the PCP display. The >
character tells the flight crew that the message is a stored call.
Therefore, they are aware that there was a call from door 1 right
(dial code 21) while they were on the cabin interphone system. The
call from door 2 left stays in memory.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 93
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

When the call to DOOR 1 RIGHT stops, there is a low chime in the
flight deck and the message DOOR 2 LEFT >12 shows on the PCP.
So the flight crew is aware that there was a call from door 2 left. The
flight crew member decides to call door 2 left. Once that call stops,
there is a low chime in the flight deck and the message UP/DECK
GALLEY >56 shows on the PCP.

23.42.0744B-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 94
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0244 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 95
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL - PILOT ALERT

Pilot alert calls have the highest priority. A pilot alert call overrides At this point, the cabin interphone handset at door 1 left gets a type
any call in the flight deck except: 2 busy signal. The call stops and does not go into memory.

- Another pilot alert call already in progress The message PILOT ALERT W1 shows on the PCP. The characters
W1 mean that there is a stored call message. A low chime sounds.
- A flight deck passenger address announcement
When the pilot alert stops, a low chime sounds and the message
The pilots' call panel (PCP) tells the flight crew that there is a pilot DOOR 3 RIGHT >23 shows on the PCP. This means that there was
ALERT CALL. a call from that location while the cabin interphone system was in
use.
For example, door 1 left calls the flight deck. A low chime sounds,
and the message DOOR 1 LEFT shows on the PCP. The flight crew member can then dial 23 to return the call. The flight
crew member can also push the RST pushbutton to delete the
While the flight crew member is on a call with door 1 left, a call to the stored call message and to cause the message DIRECTORY to
flight deck comes from door 3 right. The attendant at door 3 right show on the PCP.
gets a type 1 busy signal. The cabin interphone controller (CIC)
23.42.0745 -001
stores the call and the characters W1 show on the right side of the
PCP display.

When a pilot alert comes from an attendant station:

- A low chime sounds

- The call from door 1 left stops

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 96
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0245 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 97
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 98
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0246 -006

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 99
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL OPERATION

General Description Call Locations and Messages

The pilots' call panel (PCP) has a microprocessor which controls its The CIC sends the pilots' call panel:
functions.
- Messages (PA IN USE, VIDEO IN USE, etc.)
The cabin interphone controller sends 28v dc to a power supply
which supplies power for operation of the PCP. - Call location messages

The panel lights and the autobrightness control circuit get 5v ac. This data goes to the microprocessor. The microprocessor causes
the messages to show on the LED display.
The autobrightness control circuit senses the amount of light in the
23.42.0747 -001
flight deck and adjusts the brightness of the LED display.Dial Code
Data

Discrete pulses go from the keyboard to the microprocessor when a

code is dialed. The microprocessor decodes the inputs from the
keyboard and sends the dial code data to the cabin interphone
controller (CIC).

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 100
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0247 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 101
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - CABIN INTERPHONE HANDSET OPERATION

General Description Microphone Audio

The cabin interphone handsets (CIHs): Analog audio from the microphone goes through an amplifier to the
on-hook reset circuit. The on-hook reset circuit sends power to the
- Get cabin interphone audio from the LACs microphone only when the handset off-hook and the reset button is
not pushed. A magnet in the handset holder closes a magnetic
- Send dial code data to the local area controllers (LACs) switch to do the on-hook/off-hook function.

- Send microphone audio to LACs

PTT Signal
- Send a PTT (push-to-talk) signal to the LACs
Two PTT (push-to-talk) switches send ground discrete signals when
pushed. They are only used to make passenger address
Cabin Interphone Audio announcements. The PTT switches have no effect on the cabin
operation.
The cabin interphone handset gets analog audio from the LAC to
23.42.0748 -002
which it connects. The audio goes to the earphone.

Dial Code Data

Discrete pulses from the dial code buttons go to an encoder and

transmitter circuit. This circuit sends the dial codes to the LAC to
which the handset connects.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 102
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0248 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 103
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - CABIN INTERPHONE CONTROLLER NORMAL AND

ALTERNATE CIRCUITS

The cabin interphone controller (CIC) has these two fully redundant
controller circuits:

- Normal
- Alternate

Each circuit can do all CIC functions. All interfaces with the CIC
connect in parallel to both circuits.

Normally, the cabin interphone switch on the cabin configuration test

module (CCTM) is open. When it is open, it sends an open discrete
to an inverter on the motherboard of the CIC (an open is a logic
one). This sends a logic zero to switch S1. The switch sends 28v dc
to the normal controller circuit.

When the cabin interphone switch closes, it sends a ground discrete

from the CIC back to the CIC to an inverter on the motherboard (a
ground is a logic zero). This sends a logic one to switch S1. The
switch sends 28v dc to the alternate controller and removes power
from the normal circuit. Thus, the alternate circuit now does all the
CIC functions.

23.42.0749 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 104
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0249 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 105
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - CABIN INTERPHONE CONTROLLER OPERATION

General Description Flight Interphone System Interface

The cabin interphone controller (CIC) is microprocessor-controlled. There is an audio interface between the cabin interphone system
and the audio management unit (AMU) to let the flight crew use the
The 28v dc battery bus sends 28v dc power to a power supply. The flight deck microphones and headsets for cabin interphone
power supply circuit supplies dc power for operation of the CIC and functions.
28v dc to the pilots' call panel (PCP).
A cabin interphone call set output to the AMU makes the cabin call
light in the audio control panel (ACP) come on.
Call Connection

23.42.0750A-002
Digitized audio and dial data come from each local area controller
(LAC). This data goes to bus interface circuits.

Each bus interface circuit sends:

- The dial data to the microprocessor and support circuits. These

circuits send the multiplexer and mixer the call connection data.

- The digitized audio to the multiplexer and mixer.

The multiplexer and mixer connects the digital audio to the

appropriate bus interface circuit, which sends the digital audio to the
LAC.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 106
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Flight Interphone System Interface (cont)

The pilots' call panel (PCP) sends the CIC dial data. It gets call
A cabin call reset discrete output from the CIC tells the AMU to make locations and messages from the CIC.
the cabin call light in the ACP go off. This happens when the flight
deck handset (FDH) goes off-hook. When there is a call to the flight deck, the microprocessor and
support logic gets the dial data. The The microprocessor and
A cabin interphone off-hook discrete goes to the CIC when the cabin support logic circuit then tells the PCP the location of the station that
interphone transmit switch on the ACP is pushed. This tells the CIC made the call.
to send cabin interphone audio (e.g. a dial tone) to the AMU.
23.42.0750B-002

A priority line discrete is generated by the AMU when the CAB

transmit switch on the ACP is pushed twice within three seconds.

All of these inputs and outputs go to and from a digital-to-analog and

analog-to-digital (D/A and A/D) converter. The D/A and A/D
converter sends and receives digital audio and data to and from the
multiplexer and mixer.

Passenger Address Interface

Digitized audio and passenger area data go to the passenger

address controller (PAC). This is for passenger announcements.

When there is a call to an attendant station, the microprocessor and

support logic tells the PAC to sound a chime at the attendant station.

Pilots' Call Panel Interface

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 107
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Pilots' Call Panel Interface (cont)

A video-in-use discrete goes to the microprocessor and support logic

from the video system control unit (VSCU). This discrete tells the
CIC that the video system is in use in the passenger cabin. The
microprocessor and support logic sends a VIDEO IN USE message
to the PCP.

Flight Deck Chime

When there is a call to the flight deck, a chime discrete signal goes
to the modularized avionics and warning electronics assembly
(MAWEA). This discrete tells MAWEA to sound a chime in the flight
deck.

There are two discretes which go in parallel to the MAWEA:

- PP CHIME, for pilot alert calls

- CHIME, for all other calls

Normal/Alternate Circuit Selection

The CIC contains two identical circuits. Only one of these circuits is
on at a time. The cabin configuration/test module (CCTM) has a
switch which makes the selection between normal and alternate
circuits.

23.42.0750C-002

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 108
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0250 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 109
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 110
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER OPERATION

General Description The CIC sends the LACs:

The local area controllers have three internal circuits which serve - Attendant call lights data
systems within the advanced cabin entertainment and service
system (ACESS). Each internal circuit is dedicated to only one - Digitized audio, which includes voice, dial tone, ring back, and
system. The systems which use these three internal circuits are: busy signals

- The cabin interphone system (CIS) The LACs send the CIC:

- The passenger address system (PAS) - Dial code data

- Digitized audio
- The passenger service, passenger entertainment audio, and - PTT (for passenger address announcements)
cabin lighting systems (PSS, PES audio, and CLS)
Each LAC can make up to 10 attendant call lights come on, and can
The three internal circuits within the local area controllers are interface with up to 5 cabin interphone handsets.
independent of each other, and each has its own power source.
The graphic below shows only the operation of LAC 1. LACs 2, 3
and 4 operate in a similar way.
General Operation

The local area controllers (LACs) get data from and send data to the Power
cabin interphone controller (CIC).
The LACs get 28v dc for internal operation.

23.42.0751A-002

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 111
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Attendant Call Lights

LAC 1 connects with the attendant call lights at door 1 left, door 1 The A/D converter sends the digitized microphone audio to the I/O
right, and door 2 galley. data port. The I/O data port multiplexes it with other audio and sends
it to the CIC.
The data that tells the LAC to make an attendant call light come on
comes from the CIC. The I/O (input/output) data port decodes the
data. It sends an enabling pulse to the attendant call light driver, Attendant Earphone Audio
which turns on the appropriate attendant call light.
Digitized audio from the CIC goes to the I/O data port. The I/O data
demultiplexes the audio and sends it to the appropriate digital to
Dial Codes analog (D/A) converters in the handset interface circuits. The analog
audio then goes to the cabin interphone handsets.
The cabin interphone handsets (CIHs) send the dial codes to the
23.42.0751B-002
LAC. The PTT/signal decoder decodes the dial codes and
re-encodes them with the PTT signal. This digital signal goes to the
A/D converter. This circuit encodes this signal with the microphone
audio and sends it to the I/O data circuit, which sends it to the CIC.

Attendant Microphone Audio

Attendant microphone audio from the cabin interphone handsets

goes to the filters in the handset interface circuits. The filters send
the audio to the analog to digital (A/D) converter, which digitizes the
audio.

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 112
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0251 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 113
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 114
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CIS - PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES

General Description Handset Installation for Attendant Stations and Flight Deck

ACESS uses a configuration data base to accommodate different The cabin interphone controller (CIC) must have in its memory the
airplane configurations. Only the data base for the cabin interphone number of cabin interphone handsets installed and their locations,
system is discussed here. which includes the flight deck handset.

Programmable Features Dial Code Directory

The features that are programmable in the cabin interphone system The dial code directory must be in the memory of the CIC. This
are: includes data such as which stations are the primary and secondary
stations.
- Handset installation for attendant stations and flight deck

- Dial code directory Visual and Aural Call Annunciations

- Visual and aural call annunciations The types of visual and aural call annunciations at the attendant
stations are in the configuration program. The messages which
- Accessibility of dial codes from attendant stations and flight deck show on the pilots' call panel are also in the configuration program.

23.42.0752A-001
- Pilot alert (PP) chime output pulses in the flight deck

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 115
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Accessibility of Dial Codes from Attendant and Flight Deck Locations

Dial codes can be configured to be non-accessible from attendant

locations and/or the flight deck. The configuration database can
make a code accessible or non-accessible for all attendant stations,
not for particular attendant stations.

Pilot Alert (PP) Chime Output Pulses in the Flight Deck

The number of chimes that sound in the flight deck when there is a
pilot alert call can be configured from zero to eight.

23.42.0752B-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 116
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0252 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 117
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 118
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.42.0253 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 119
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Cabin Interphone System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-42

Issue: 1 Page 120
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PASSENGER ADDRESS SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION ................ 2 PAS - CABIN MANAGEMENT TERMINAL (CMT) ......................... 52
PASSENGER ADDRESS SYSTEM ............................................... 4 PAS - PASSENGER ADDRESS CONTROLLER ........................... 54
PAS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - FLIGHT DECK ..................... 8 PAS - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER ............................................. 56
PAS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - MAIN EQUIPMENT PAS - INBOARD OVERHEAD ELECTRONICS UNIT.................... 58
CENTER ................................................................................... 10 PAS - INBOARD OVERHEAD ELECTRONICS UNIT
PAS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - CABIN - 1 ............................ 12 INSTALLATION ......................................................................... 60
PAS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - CABIN - 2 ............................ 14 PAS - I-OEU TERMINATION PLUG .............................................. 62
PAS - AREAS FOR ANNOUNCEMENTS ...................................... 16 PAS - SPEAKERS ......................................................................... 64
PAS - POWER INTERFACE .......................................................... 20 PAS - SPEAKER INSTALLATION ................................................. 66
PAS - ANNOUNCEMENT PRIORITY ............................................ 22 PAS - CABIN CONFIGURATION TEST MODULE ........................ 69
PAS - FLIGHT INTERPHONE INTERFACE .................................. 24 PAS - PA FUNCTIONS MENU ....................................................... 72
PAS - DIRECT ACCESS INTERFACE .......................................... 26 PAS - PA VOLUME CONTROL FUNCTION - 1 ............................. 74
PAS - CABIN INTERPHONE SYSTEM INTERFACE .................... 28 PAS - PA VOLUME CONTROL FUNCTION -2 .............................. 76
PAS - VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM INTERFACE ............. 30 PAS - CENTRAL MANAGEMENT UNIT ........................................ 78
PAS - PAC CHIME CONTROL INTERFACE ................................. 33 PAS - PRIORITY 1 AND 2 OPERATION ....................................... 83
PAS - PA AUDIO OUTPUT ............................................................ 36 PAS - PASSENGER ADDRESS CONTROLLER NORMAL AND
PAS - AUDIO LEVEL CONTROL ................................................... 39 ALTERNATE CIRCUITS ........................................................... 86
PAS - AUDIO CONTROL PANEL .................................................. 42 PAS - PASSENGER ADDRESS CONTROLLER OPERATION..... 89
PAS - CABIN INTERPHONE HANDSET AND DIRECT ACCESS PAS - INBOARD OVERHEAD ELECTRONICS UNIT
SWITCH ................................................................................... 45 OPERATION ............................................................................. 95
PAS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL ......................................................... 48 PAS - PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES .......................................... 98
PAS - TYPES OF CIS PA ANNOUNCEMENTS ............................ 50

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 1
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PASSENGER ADDRESS SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION

The passenger address system (PAS) sends audio to speakers in

the passenger cabin. Audio for announcements comes from the
flight deck, flight attendants, and other sources.

23.31.0701 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 2
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0201 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 3
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PASSENGER ADDRESS SYSTEM

Purpose

The passenger address system (PAS) sends these audio signals to - Passenger address speakers
the passenger cabin: - Central management unit (CMU)
- Cabin configuration test module (CCTM)
- Flight deck announcements (priority 1) - Direct access speaker mute relays
- Direct access announcements (priority 2A)
- Attendant announcements (priority 2B) The components/systems which interface with the PAS are:
- Video entertainment audio (priority 3)
- Chimes - Enhanced passenger entertainment system controler (EPESC)
- Cabin interphone controller (CIC)
- Entertainment/service controller (ESC)
General - Audio management unit (AMU)
- Cabin Management Terminal (CMT)
The main components of the PAS are the:
23.31.0702A-002

- Passenger address controller (PAC) -

- Local area controllers (LACs)
- Inboard overhead electronics units (I-OEUs)
- I-OEU termination plugs

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 4
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Operation

The passenger address controller gets inputs for announcements The PAC gets no smoking and fasten seat belt discretes to sound
from: the lo chime.

- The audio management unit (AMU) for flight deck Additional discrete inputs increase the PA volume level. An increase
announcements. occurs when:

- The local area controllers (LAC) for direct access - The engines are running.
announcements. - The airplane is airborne.
- The airplane is flying at 15 knots below maximum velocity.
- The cabin interphone controller (CIC) for attendant - A decompression of the passenger cabin occurs.
announcements and attendant call chimes.
Announcements, chime and volume data go through the local area
- The Cabin Mnagement Terminal (CMT) for video audio selection controllers to the inboard overhead electronics units (I-OEUs). The
for the PA system. I-OEUs amplify the audio and send it to the speakers.

- The entertainment service controller (ESC) for generating The passenger address level control sensors provide automatic
passenger to attendant call chimes. volume control.

- The enhanced passenger entertainment system controller An I-OEU termination plug on the last I-OEU in a column provides a
(EPESC) for PA announcements in the Business Class. terminating load which matches the impedance of the transmission
cable.
- The enhanced video system controle unit (EVSCU) for PA
23.31.0702B-002
interface between overhead video system and PA system.

- Audio Balancing Unit 3 provisions for boarding music.

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 5
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Operation (cont)

The CCTM provides a switch to select the normal or alternate

controller circuit in the passenger address controller.

During direct access announcements the direct access speaker

mute relays mute the speaker in the area of the direct access
handset.

23.31.0702C-002

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 6
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0202 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 7
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - FLIGHT DECK

The PAS circuit breakers located in the flight deck are:

- PASS ADRS 1
- PASS ADRS 2
- PASS ADRS 3
- PASS ADRS 4

23.31.0706 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 8
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0206 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 9
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - MAIN EQUIPMENT CENTER

The PAS components and components which interface with the PAS
in the main equipment center are the:

- Passenger address controller (PAC)

- Central management unit (CMU)
- ENT/SERV-DC circuit breaker
- ENT/SERV-AC circuit breaker
- Audio entertainment relay, R7578

23.31.0703 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 10
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0203 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 11
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - CABIN - 1

The PAS components, and components which interface with the

PAS, located in the passenger cabin are:

- Local area controller-1

- Local area controller-2
- Local area controller-3
- Local area controller-4
- The cabin configuration test module
- Direct access switches

23.31.0704 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 12
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0204 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 13
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - CABIN - 2

The PAS components located in the passenger cabin are:

- Inboard overhead electronics units (IOEUs)

- Speakers
- Direct access speaker mute relays

23.31.0705 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 14
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0205 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 15
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - AREAS FOR ANNOUNCEMENTS

There are 4 passenger address (PA) areas in the passenger cabin.

The configuration program determines where the areas begin and
end. A local area controller may supply announcements to one or
two PA areas.

The graphic shows the local area controllers and columns of

inboard-overhead electronics units (I-OEUs) connected to them.

23.31.0719 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 16
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0219 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 17
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 18
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0208 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 19
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - POWER INTERFACE

The ENT/SERV-AC circuit breaker sends 115v ac from BUS 1 to the The PASS ADRS 2 circuit breaker sends 28v dc to the:
central management unit (CMU).
- Zone B I-OEUs
The cabin configuration test module (CCTM) gets 28v ac from the - Zone D I-OEUs
CMU.
The PASS ADRS 3 circuit breaker sends 28v dc to the zone E
A ground from the boarding music control panel, or from the I-OEUs.
entertainment/service controller (a component of the passenger
entertainment system) goes to the audio entertainment relay, The PASS ADRS 4 circuit breaker sends 28v dc to the zone C
R7578. When the relay energizes, 115v ac goes to the I-OEUs.
entertainment tape reproducer.

23.31.0707 -003
The PASS ADRS 1 circuit breaker sends 28v dc to the:

- Passenger address controller (PAC)

- Zone A inboard-overhead electronics units (I-OEUs)
- Upper deck I-OEUs
- LAC 1, LAC 2 and LAC 3. The LACs send 28v dc to the handset
holders at doors 1 and 4 left.

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 20
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0207 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 21
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - ANNOUNCEMENT PRIORITY

The priority 1 input is from the flight interphone system.

The priority 2A input is from the cabin interphone system (CIS)

through the direct access handsets.

The priority 2B input is from the CIS cabin interphone controller

(CIC).

The priority 3 input is video audio.

23.31.0709 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 22
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0209 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 23
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - FLIGHT INTERPHONE INTERFACE

General

The flight interphone system sends the priority 1 input to the

passenger address controller (PAC).

Operation

The audio management unit (AMU) sends mic audio and a

push-to-talk (PTT) discrete to the PAC. Push the PA transmit switch
on an audio control panel to select PA. Push a PTT switch to send a
PTT discrete to the AMU.

Priority 1 PA announcements go to all PA areas. The PAC sends

sidetone audio back to the AMU so that the flight crew can monitor
their announcement.

23.31.0711 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 24
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0211 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 25
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - DIRECT ACCESS INTERFACE

The direct access switches are on the cabin interphone handset

holders at doors 1 and 4 left.

Push a direct access switch to send the DIRECT ACCESS ON

signal to the appropriate local area controller (LAC) and direct
access speaker mute relay.

The DIRECT ACCESS ON signal closes:

- A relay in the LAC. This relay sends the PTT and mic audio from
the cabin interphone handset (CIH) to the PAC.

- The direct access speaker mute relays. These relays mute

speakers near the CIH.

The passenger address controller (PAC) sends priority 2A (direct

access) audio and data through the LACs to the I-OEUs as PA
announcements.

Priority 2A PA announcements go to all PA areas.

During a priority 2A PA announcement the CIH OFF HOOK signal

latches the relay in the LAC.

23.31.0712 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 26
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0212 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 27
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - CABIN INTERPHONE SYSTEM INTERFACE

General

The cabin interphone system sends the priority 2b input to the When more than one cabin interphone handset attempts a PA
passenger address controller (PAC). announcement, the CIC examines the dial data, and determines
which handset has priority.

Operation The CIC sends the PAC:

The cabin interphone handsets (CIHs) send the local area - A PTT discrete
controllers (LACs):
- Digital mic audio
- A PTT discrete
- Mic audio - PA area dial data to determine which PA area or areas get the
- PA area dial data announcement

23.31.0713 -001

The LAC:

- Converts the mic audio from analog to digital

- Multiplexes the PTT discrete, digital audio, and dial data

- Sends the multiplexed data to the cabin interphone controller

(CIC)

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 28
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0213 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 29
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM INTERFACE

General

The enhanced video system control unit sends the priority 3b input
to the passenger address controller (PAC).

Operation

Video tape reproducers send video and audio to the enhanced video
system control unit (EVSCU). With the cabin management terminal
(CMT) it is possible to select video audio for PA announcements.
The EVSCU:

- Sends two video audio outputs and their keylines to the PAC

23.31.0715 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 30
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0215 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 31
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 32
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - PAC CHIME CONTROL INTERFACE

General

The passenger address controller (PAC) gets both discrete and - Decompression
digital data inputs to control chimes. Chimes are superimposed on
PAS audio, therefore, there is no priority for chimes. The fasten seat belt discrete goes to the PAC when the fasten seat
belts switch (S2) on the passenger information signs module is ON
or in AUTO and any of the following conditions are true:
Discrete Inputs
- The flaps are down
The passenger address controller (PAC) gets discrete inputs from
the passenger information signs module to turn on a low chime - The landing gear is down and locked
when the no smoking or fasten seat belt sign turns on or off. The
discretes also go to the entertainment/service controller to turn on - The cabin altitude pressure is more than 10,000 feet
the passenger information signs.
The PAC gets discrete inputs from the: - The altitude is less than 10,300 feet.
23.31.0716A-001

- Crew alerting card

- Passenger information signs module

The no smoking discrete goes to the PAC when the no smoking

switch (S1) on the passenger information signs module is ON or is in
AUTO and any of the following conditions are true:

- The landing gear is down and locked

- The cabin altitude pressure is more than 10,000 feet.

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 33
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Data Inputs

The PAC gets data from the entertainment/service controller to

sound a high chime for:

- Passenger-to-attendant calls
- Lavatory-to-attendant calls
- Smoke detected in a lavatory

The PAC gets data from the cabin interphone controller to sound a
high/low chime for:

- Attendant-to-attendant calls
- Pilot-to-attendant calls

23.31.0716B-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 34
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0216 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 35
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - PA AUDIO OUTPUT

Operation PA Override

The passenger address controller (PAC): PA announcements go to the entertainment/service controller to

override audio in the passenger entertainment headsets in the
- Gets audio and push-to-talk inputs economy class.

23.31.0717 -001
- Determines which input has the highest priority

- Converts the selected input from analog to digital

- Sends audio to the local area controllers (LAC) for distribution to

the inboard overhead electronics units (I-OEUs).

- Sends audio to the EPESC for distribution to the business clss

seats.

Each I-OEU changes the audio to analog, amplifies it, and sends the
audio to the speakers. All I-OEUs have two amplifiers. Each
amplifier has a dedicated speaker.

PA Areas

The passenger address system lets PA announcements go to the

entire passenger cabin, or to any of four PA areas.

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 36
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0217 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 37
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 38
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - AUDIO LEVEL CONTROL

General

These four different methods adjust the audio level of passenger NOTE: On the ground with engines off, the PA volume level sets to
address announcements and chimes: -6db.

- Configuration program settings The discrete inputs that control volume are:

- Cabin configuration test module (CCTM) adjustments - Engine on (-3 db). The GND PWR sense relay energizes when
ground power is applied to the airplane. When an engine starts,
- Discrete inputs the integrated drive generator (IDG) supplies power, and the
GND PWR sense relay de-energizes. This provides an engine on
(open) discrete to the passenger address controller.
Configuration Program Settings
- Airborne (0 db). The AIR/GND relay R121 sends an open
The configuration database separates the passenger cabin into discrete when the airplane is off the ground.
eleven separate areas for PA volume control. The program also sets
23.31.0718A-001
a default level for each of the PA volume areas.

Automatic Audio Level Control

Discrete inputs are used for automatic audio level control.

Discrete inputs increase or decrease the volume of all PA areas in 3

db increments, with airborne (0 db) as the reference if the PALCS
are turned off.

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 39
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

The discrete inputs that control volume are: (cont)

- Vmo-15 KTS (+3 db). Logic circuits in the modularized avionics

warning electronics assembly (MAWEA) send a ground discrete
when the airplane is within fifteen knots of the maximum
operating velocity (Vmo).

- Decompression (+6 db). The decompression relay R36 sends a

ground discrete when the oxygen lines in the passenger cabin
are pressurized.

The maximum amplifier output level under any condition is 5 watts.

CCTM Adjustments

Control on the CCTM let the volume level in any of the eleven PA
volume areas increase above the default level. The volume can
never go below the default level. When power is removed from the
system, the PA volume settings return to their default levels.

23.31.0718B-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 40
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0218 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 41
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - AUDIO CONTROL PANEL

Purpose
- Adjust the passenger address receiver volume control for the
The audio control panel (ACP) gives the flight crew control of the desired sidetone volume level.
flight interphone system. Controls on the ACP allow the flight
interphone system to make passenger address announcements. - Push the spring-loaded PTT switch to the R/T position.

- Speak into the microphone.

Operation
CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
To make a priority 1 passenger address announcement with the READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
flight interphone system: ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
- Push the passenger address transmit switch. The white MIC light BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.
comes on.
23.31.0720 -001

The passenger address announcement goes to the entire passenger

cabin and sidetone comes back to the flight interphone system.

To make a priority 2b passenger address announcement with the

flight interphone system through the cabin interphone system:

- Push the CAB transmit switch; the white MIC light comes on.

- Dial the PA area for announcment on the PCP.

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 42
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0220 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 43
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 44
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - CABIN INTERPHONE HANDSET AND DIRECT ACCESS

SWITCH

Cabin Interphone Handset

The cabin interphone handsets let the attendants make passenger The PA announcement goes to PA area 1 only. The PA
address (PA) announcements in one or more PA areas. announcement also goes to all passenger entertainment system
headsets in area 1.
The dial code buttons on the cabin interphone handset (CIH) let an
attendant enter a dial code for a PA announcement in any PA area. To end the PA announcement:
A placard on the back of the handset lists dialing codes.
- Release the PTT button
To make a PA announcement in PA area 1:
- Push the reset button, or
- Pick up the handset.
- Hang up the cabin interphone handset.
- Push dial code button 4 and then 1. If a PA announcement is
already in progress in PA area 1, a busy 1 signal is heard in the Other dial codes let the attendants make announcements into the
earphone. different PA areas.

- Push and hold either of the push-to-talk buttons. The flight deck handset lets the flight crew make PA announcements
in one or more PA areas. There are no dial code buttons on the flight
- Talk into the microphone. deck handset. The flight crew enters the dial code on the pilot's call
panel.
No sidetone is heard in the earphone during the announcement.
23.31.0722A-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 45
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Direct Access Switch

The direct access switch gives the attendant a higher priority To end a direct access PA announcement:
passenger address (PA) announcement than is normally available
using a cabin interphone handset. This function is also useful as a - Release the push-to-talk button.
backup mode to make PA announcements in case of some cabin
interphone or PA faults. - Hang up the cabin interphone handset. The white light inside the
direct access switch goes out.
Cabin interphone handsets normally connect to the cabin interphone
23.31.0722B-001
controller through the local area controller. During a direct access
PA announcement the cabin interphone handset connects directly to
the passenger address controller.

Push the direct access switch to connect the cabin interphone

handset directly to the passenger address controller.

To make a direct access PA announcement:

- Pick up the handset

- Push the direct access switch. A white light inside the switch
turns on.

- Push and hold either of the push-to-talk buttons.

- Talk into the microphone.

The PA announcement is heard in the entire passenger cabin. There

is no sidetone during PA announcements.

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 46
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0222 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 47
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - PILOTS' CALL PANEL

Purpose

The pilots' call panel lets the flight crew enter a dial code for a PA
announcement in any PA area.

Operation

Operation of the pilots' call panel dial code buttons is the same as a
cabin interphone handset. The LED display shows the PA area
dialed.

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.31.0723 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 48
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0223 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 49
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - TYPES OF CIS PA ANNOUNCEMENTS

General

The cabin interphone system (CIS) gets inputs from the handsets Multiple dial codes let PA announcements go to any number of PA
and pilot's call panel for PA announcements. The cabin interphone areas. To select areas 1 and 2, enter dial codes 41 followed by 42.
system lets only the highest priority PA announcements go to the PA areas 1 and 2 will hear the announcement.
passenger address system. Priority depends on the dial code
23.31.0724 -002
entered.

Priority

The cabin interphone system processes three types of PA

announcements. These are:

- Area announcements
- PA-all-area announcements
- Priority PA-all-area announcements

Area and PA-all-area announcements have the same level of

priority. They operate on a first-come, first-serve basis. If a PA
announcement is in process in PA area 1 (dial code 41) and a PA
all-area announcement (dial code 46) is attempted, a busy 1 signal
sounds in the handset. A priority PA-all-area announcement (dial
code 4P) overrides both area and PA-all-area announcements.

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 50
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0224 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 51
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - CABIN MANAGEMENT TERMINAL (CMT)

General

The cabin management terminal (CMT) is the central component for

operation and control of passenger entertainment system (PES)
video.

Controls on the front of the unit control the PES video audio that
goes to the passenger address system. The video audio goes to a
selected PA area, or to all PA areas. The VSCU also adjusts the PA
volume level.

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.31.0735 -006

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 52
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 53
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - PASSENGER ADDRESS CONTROLLER

Purpose
General Description
The passenger address controller (PAC):
The PAC has two identical controller circuits (normal and alternate).
- Accepts and stores configuration data from the central One controller circuit does all the functions of the PAC. Only one
management unit. controller circuit operates at a time. If there is a failure of the normal
controller, the alternate controller performs the functions of the PAC
- Sets priority for analog and digital audio inputs from various when the alternate controller is manually selected on the cabin
systems. configuration test module.

- Converts the highest priority analog audio input to digital audio. CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
- Accepts discretes and digital data inputs for chimes. ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
- Accepts discretes and digital inputs to adjust PA volume levels. BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.31.0736 -001
- Sends the digitized audio, chime data and PA volume data to the
local area controllers for distribution to the inboard overhead
electronics units.

- Sends digitized audio to the EPESC for distribution to the

business class seats.

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 54
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0236 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 55
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER

Purpose

The local area controller (LAC) gets digital inputs from the
passenger address controller and sends the data to the inboard
overhead electronics units.

Characteristics

The LAC has three independent assemblies. One assembly does

functions of the passenger address system, one does functions of
the cabin interphone system, and one does functions of passenger
entertainment, passenger service and cabin lighting systems.

The LAC also gets inputs from a cabin interphone handset and
direct access switch. The LAC sends handset audio and push-to-talk
signals directly to the passenger address controller when the direct
access switch is pushed.

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.31.0737 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 56
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0237 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 57
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - INBOARD OVERHEAD ELECTRONICS UNIT

Purpose

The inboard overhead electronics unit (I-OEU): Each I-OEU has two separate PA amplifiers. Each PA amplifier
delivers 5 watts (maximum) of audio into an 8-ohm speaker.
- Gets multiplexed data from the passenger address controller
(PAC), through the local area controller (LAC). This data is digital Each I-OEU also has a chime generation circuit to sound chimes
audio, area selection, chime annunciation and speaker output over the PA speakers.
volume level information.
CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
- Changes the digital audio to analog form. READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
- Decodes the area selection data and sends the selected channel (REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
to the proper PA speaker. BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.31.0738 -001

Characteristics

Each I-OEU has two independent subsystems which control

functions of the passenger address system and the passenger
service/cabin lighting systems. Only the passenger address
functions are discussed here.

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 58
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0238 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 59
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - INBOARD OVERHEAD ELECTRONICS UNIT INSTALLATION

The inboard overhead electronics units (I-OEUs) are in

approximately every other passenger service unit (PSU) panel.

Three latches hold the PSU panel in place. Push a rod into the holes
in the face of the PSU panel to release the assembly. Lanyards limit
the amount the PSU panel swings down. Three screws hold the
I-OEU in place.

23.31.0739 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 60
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0239 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 61
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - I-OEU TERMINATION PLUG

The last I-OEU in a column has a termination plug connected to the

J2 connector. The I-OEU termination plug contains a 75-ohm
resistor which matches the characteristic impedance of the
transmission cable.

23.31.0740 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 62
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0240 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 63
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - SPEAKERS

Purpose

The passenger address system speakers send audio to the

passenger cabin, the attendant stations and the lavatories.

General

The speaker above an attendant's station mutes when a PA

announcement comes from that attendant's station.

23.31.0741 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 64
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0241 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 65
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - SPEAKER INSTALLATION

Speakers are in speaker/emergency light assemblys, which mount in

the main deck ceiling panels above each aisle.

Two latches hold the speaker/emergency light assemblies in place.

Push a rod into the two speaker grill holes farthest from the
emergency light to release the assembly. Four nuts hold the speaker
in place.

Speakers in the upper deck mount in the outboard passengerervice

units. The installation is the same as the main deck speakers.

23.31.0742 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 66
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0242 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 67
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 68
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - CABIN CONFIGURATION TEST MODULE

Purpose Power

The cabin configuration test module (CCTM) has these passenger The CCTM gets 28v ac power from the central management unit
address (PA) controls: (CMU).

- A switch to change from the normal to the alternate controller

circuit of the passenger address controller (PAC). Display Symbols

- Controls to start a self-test and a display to show the results. The CCTM shows four lines of text, however, there is usually more
than four lines of text available.
- Controls to adjust the PA volume levels.
The symbols in the upper right corner of the display show that there
is more text available. The scroll-up symbol means scroll the menu
Characteristics up for more text. The scroll-down symbol means scroll down for
more text. If both symbols show at the same time, text is available in
The CCTM shows data on an liquid crystal display (LCD). The both directions.
display has four lines with 20 characters in each line.
The prompt symbol (left of the text) shows next to the selection that
The switches on the front of the unit are for: activates or clears with the menu select ENTER switch.

- Menu selections The first line of text does not move up or down. This line shows the
- Mode selections mode selection, such as SYSTEM TEST.
- Function selections
23.31.0745A-001
- Alternate systems selections

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 69
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Display Symbols (cont)

The bottom three lines show possible selections in the present The function select switches call up menus to change the
mode. configuration of:

- No smoking areas
Menu Select Switches - PA volume levels

The scroll-up and scroll-down switches move the text on the display
up or down. Alternate System Switches

The ENTER switch starts the command next to the prompt. The alternate system switches are alternate action switches with
lights inside to show their status.
The CLEAR switch (used in the function select modes) sets the no
smoking areas and PA volume levels to their default values. The PASSENGER ADDRESS switch is a manual selection of the
alternate controller circuit in the passenger address controller. When
normal is selected, a light in the switch is off. To select alternate,
Mode Select Switches push the switch once and the light comes on.

Push the TEST switch to put the ACESS system in the test mode. CAUTION: STATIC SENSITVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
Push the PROGRAM switch to put the ACESS system in the ACESS ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
program mode. (REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.
Push the NORMAL switch to return ACESS to its normal mode.

23.31.0745B-001
Function Select Switches

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 70
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0245 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 71
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - PA FUNCTIONS MENU

General Description

The PA functions menu on the cabin configuration test module

(CCTM) has selections to:

- Increase the PA volume in a selected area.

- Monitor the passenger address level control sensor (PALCS)

readings. (NOT OPERATIONAL ON KLM AIRPLANES)

- Turn PALCS operation on or off. (NOT OPERATIONAL ON KLM

AIRPLANES)

Operation

To access the PA functions menu:

- Push the PA function select button. The PA FUNCTIONS menu

shows in the display.

- Push the scroll down button to view all possible selections.

- Push the ENTER button to select a specific PA function.

23.31.0746 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 72
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0246 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 73
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - PA VOLUME CONTROL FUNCTION - 1

General Operation

The passenger address speakers are divided into eleven speaker To adjust the PA volume in speaker volume zone A, follow these
volume zones. The configuration program in the passenger address steps:
controller (PAC) assigns each speaker to a zone.
- Push the PA function select button. The PA FUNCTIONS menu
The configuration program also sets the base volume level for each shows.
speaker volume zone.
- With PA VOLUME CONTROL next to the prompt, push ENTER.
The cabin configuration test module (CCTM) has controls to adjust
the PA volume level in each speaker volume zone. The volume level - With VOLUME ZONE A next to the prompt, push ENTER. The
can only increase from the level set by the configuration program. current valve of VOLUME ZONE A is 00, which is the default
value.
Changes to volume levels store in random access memory (RAM) in
the active passenger address controller circuit. The data stays in - To increase the current value, push the SCROLL UP button. The
RAM until power is removed from the airplane. current value increases by one (+3dB).

When power is re-applied, the PA volume levels in each zone are

23.31.0747 -001
again at the level assigned by the configuration program.

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 74
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0247 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 75
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - PA VOLUME CONTROL FUNCTION -2

Operation (cont)

- Push the ENTER button. The new configuration data goes to the
central management unit for transfer to the normal or alternate
controller circuit in the PAC. The volume level increases in
speaker volume zone A by +3dB. The PA VOLUME CONTROL
menu shows on the CCTM.

- Select another speaker volume zone and adjust its volume, or

push the normal button to return to the normal mode.

NOTE: After an increase in volume level is done, a decrease in

volume level to a value other than the 00 value, requires the
operator to clear the setting to 00 and then increases to the desired
setting.

23.31.0748 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 76
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0248 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 77
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - CENTRAL MANAGEMENT UNIT

The CMU sends PA volume control and PALCS on/off commands

from the cabin configuration test module (CCTM) to the passenger
address controller.

Other functions of the central management unit (CMU) are to:

- Receive and store the ACESS configuration program.

- Send the ACESS configuration program to the ACESS

subsystems.

- Send test commands to the ACESS subsystems.

- Collect the results of ACESS tests and send the results to the
CCTM.

- Collect real-time fault status of the ACESS subsystems.

- Send real-time ACESS status data to the EFIS/EICAS interface

units (EIUs). From there, it goes to the central maintenance
computers (CMCs).

23.31.0752 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 78
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0252 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 79
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 80
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0253 -005

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 81
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 82
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - PRIORITY 1 AND 2 OPERATION

General

The flight interphone system sends priority 1 audio to the PAC. - The light in the switch to come on.

Cabin interphone handsets send direct access (priority 2a) and - The direct access speaker mute relay and a relay in the LAC to
cabin interphone system (priority 2b) audio to the PAC. energize.

- 28v dc to go through the CIH on-hook switch to keep the relay in

Priority 1 PA Announcements the LAC energized.

Use the PA transmit switch on the audio control panel (ACP) to Mic audio and the PTT discrete go through the energized relay in the
make a PA announcement through the flight interphone system. LAC to the PAC for priority 2a PA announcements. Dial data is not
When the MIC light for PA is on, push a PTT. The AMU then sends a needed for direct access PA announcements.
PTT and audio from that flight interphone station to the PAC. This is
priority 1 audio. When the cabin interphone handset is placed in the CIH holder, the
CIH on-hook switch opens and 28-volt dc is removed from the relay
in the LAC. When the 28-volt dc is removed:
Direct Access PA Announcements
- The direct access speaker mute relay and a relay in the LAC
The cabin interphone handset (CIH) holders at doors 1 and 4 left de-energize
have a direct access switch.
- The cabin interphone handset connects to cabin interphone
To make a direct access PA announcement, pick up the handset system circuits in the LAC.
and push the direct access switch. 28v dc from the local area
controller (LAC) causes: - The light in the direct access switch turns off.
23.31.0754A-002

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 83
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Cabin Interphone System PA Announcements

Attendants can use any cabin interphone handset to make PA The cabin interphone controller determines which inputs have the
announcements through the cabin interphone system (CIS). The highest priority. Multiplexed data goes to the passenger address
flight crew can use the pilot call panel (PCP) with the flight deck controller for priority 2b PA announcements.
handset (FDH) to make PA announcements through the CIS.

23.31.0754B-002
To make a CIS PA announcement, pick up a handset and enter the
dial code for the PA area or areas for the announcement and push
the PTT switch. Mic audio, the PTT discrete and dial data go to the
local area controller (LAC).

The LAC:

- Changes the mic audio from analog to digital

- Multiplexes the digital audio, PTT discrete and the dial data

- Encodes the multiplexed data for transmission to the cabin

interphone controller

The cabin interphone controller gets:

- Multiplexed data from LACs 1, 2, 3 and 4.

- Mic audio, a PTT discrete and dial data from the pilot call panel
and flight deck handset.

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 84
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0254 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 85
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - PASSENGER ADDRESS CONTROLLER NORMAL AND

ALTERNATE CIRCUITS

The passenger address controller (PAC) has these two fully

redundant controller circuits:

- Normal
- Alternate

Each circuit can do all PAC functions. All interfaces with the PAC
connect in parallel to both circuits.

Normally, the passenger address switch on the cabin configuration

test module (CCTM) is open. When it is open, it sends an open
discrete to an inverter on the motherboard of the PAC (an open is a
logic one). This sends a logic zero to switch S1. The switch sends
28v dc to the normal controller circuit.

When the passenger address switch closes, it sends a ground

discrete from the PAC back to the PAC to an inverter on the
motherboard (a ground is a logic zero). This sends a logic one to
switch S1. The switch sends 28v dc to the alternate controller and
removes power from the normal circuit. Thus, the alternate circuit
now does all the PAC functions.

23.31.0757 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 86
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0257 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 87
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 88
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - PASSENGER ADDRESS CONTROLLER OPERATION

PA Audio Inputs

All audio inputs to the PAC are analog, with the exception of priority only (priority 2b or 3), then audio is present on PA channel 1. Audio
2b. Priority 2b inputs are from the cabin interphone system and are to areas 2, 3, and 4, use channels 2, 3, and 4 respectively.
in a digital format. This input goes to a digital to analog converter
where up to four channels of audio (one for each PA area) then go The A/D converter changes the four channels of analog audio into a
to the audio switching matrix. Based on PTT and keyline inputs, the digital format and sends it to a manchester encoder. The
audio switching matrix sends the highest priority audio to an analog manchester encoder transmits digital audio and other data (received
to digital converter. from the controller) to a local area controller (LAC). The LAC then
passes the digital audio/data to a column of inboard overhead
electronics units (I-OEUs) which broadcast the PA announcement.
PTT and Keyline Inputs
23.31.0758A-002

The discrete input buffer gets a PTT or keyline input any time a PA
announcement is made. This information goes to the controller
which determines which of the inputs is highest in priority. The
controller then commands the audio switching matrix to send the
highest priority audio input to the A/D converter.

Audio Outputs

The A/D converter gets audio on one or more of its four PA channel
inputs. If an announcement is for the entire airplane
(priority 1, or 2a ), then audio is present on all four PA channel
inputs to the A/D converter. If the announcement is for PA area 1

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 89
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Audio Outputs (cont)

Data transmitted from the LAC includes: The entertainment/service controller (ESC) sends a Hi chime
command on a digital bus to indicate a passenger or lavatory to
- Area selection. Tells the I-OEUs in each PA area when to attendant call.
broadcast a PA announcement
The cabin interphone controller (CIC) sends a Hi-Lo chime
- Chime annunciation. Commands one or more I-OEUs to command on a digital bus to indicate an attendant to attendant call.
generate a chime
23.31.0758B-002

- Output level. For controlling PA volume levels

The manchester encoder also sends digital audio and area selection
information to the entertainment/service controller (ESC). This lets
the passenger entertainment system override entertainment audio in
the passenger headphones while a PA announcement is made.

Chime Annunciation

The PAC gets discrete and digital inputs which cause the PAC to
generate a chime annunciation command.

A Lo chime command is generated anytime the no smoking or

fasten seat belt signs are turned on or off. The PAC monitors two
discrete inputs from the passenger signs module to determine this.

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 90
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PA Volume Level Discrete Outputs

The PAC sends PA volume level commands to the I-OEUs to The PAC sends an ENT T/R pause discrete to the entertainment
increase or decrease the volume level of PA announcements. tape reproducer under these conditions:

The PAC adjusts the PA volume with four separate methods. - Priority 1 announcements
- Priority 2a announcements
- Default volume level. The PAC stores a preset volume level in - Priority 2b announcements if the announcement is broadcast in
memory. This preset level can only change by modifying the all PA areas
configuration database and loading the modified database into - Priority 3 announcements if all three video entertainment system
the PAC. keylines are active

23.31.0758C-007
- Passenger address level control sensor (PALCS). The PALCS
provide a voltage to an I-OEU proportional to the noise level in
the area where it's located. The I-OEU transmits this information
to the PAC via a LAC. The PAC then generates commands to
adjust the volume.

- Cabin configuration test module (CCTM) adjustments. The PA

volume can be manually increased above the default level at the

CCTM.

The CCTM sends adjustment commands to the PAC via the central
management unit (CMU).

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 91
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Discrete Outputs (cont)

During PA announcements a digital discrete goes to the cabin

interphone controller. This causes the cabin interphone system to
display PA IN USE on the pilots call panel (PCP). It also sents a
discrete to EPESC to pause the CD players in case off an all area
PA announcement.

Norm/Alt Select Discrete

Push the alternate systems passenger address switch on the CCTM

to send the norm/alt select discrete to the PAC. This discrete causes
power to be removed from the normal controller and power to be
applied to the alternate controller. The alternate controller performs
all functions of the PAC.

CMU Interface

The PAC gets fault status information from the I-OEUs. The PAC
sends its own status along with the status of the I-OEUs and PALCS
to the central management unit.

The PAC also interfaces with the CMU for program and test
functions.

23.31.0758D-002

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 92
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0258 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 93
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 94
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - INBOARD OVERHEAD ELECTRONICS UNIT OPERATION

PA Inputs Audio Outputs

The inboard overhead electronic units (IOEUs) get data from the PA The I-OEUs get audio as digital data from the PAC via the LACs.
controller (PAC) via the local area controller (LAC). The data The decoder sends the digital audio to the D/A when enabled by the
contains: controller. The digital audio converts to analog in the D/A and goes
to the attenuator. The attenuator gets volume control data from the
- Digital audio controller through the decoder and attenuates the audio. The
- Area selection attenuated audio goes to the ceiling speaker through the audio
- Chime annunciation amplifier.
- Output level control
23.31.0759A-001

The direct access speaker mute relay sends a discrete to the I-OEU
to mute speakers during a direct access PA announcement.

Area Selection

The decoder gets area selection data from the LAC. The data is
decoded and sent to the controller. If the IOEU is to be used for the
PA announcement the controller will enable the audio data input to
the D/A through the decoder.

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 95
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Status Monitoring

The continuity detector monitors the audio output of the amplifier.

The continuity detector sends digital data about the audio output to
the controller through the decoder. The controller uses the data from
the continuity detector to monitor the speaker interface.

Chimes

The decoder gets chime commands and sends them to the

controller. The controller enables the proper chime in the chime
generator. The chime goes to the attenuator and output in the same
way as audio.

23.31.0759B-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 96
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0259 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 97
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PAS - PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES

23.31.0761 -001

The passenger address system (PAS) uses the ACESS

configuration database to control some PAS functions.

All ACESS systems use part of the configuration database. For PAS,
this database has data for:

- Installation of local area controllers (LACs), inboard overhead

electronics units (I-OEUs), and speakers

- Speaker volume zone and definitions

- Speaker definition: inputs accepted, default volume levels

- PA area 4 inputs accepted

- Chime types and chime counts

Each speaker pair may be programmed such that it gets:

- No inputs
- Flight interphone inputs only
- Direct access and flight interphone inputs only
- All announcements to that area

All inputs are broadcast from all speakers during decompression.

Chime inputs are independent from PA announcements.

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 98
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0261 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 99
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 100
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.31.0262 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 101
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Address System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-31

Issue: 1 Page 102
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT AUDIO SYSTEM - INTRODUC- PES AUDIO - SEAT ELECTRONICS UNIT INSTALLATION ......... 42
TION (ECONOMY CLASS) ...................................................... 2 PES AUDIO - SEU INTERSEAT CABLE INSTALLATION ............. 44
PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT AUDIO SYSTEM ..................... 5 PES AUDIO - SEU TERMINATION PLUG ..................................... 46
PES AUDIO COMPONENT LOCATIONS - MAIN EQUIPMENT PES AUDIO - DIGITAL PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT ............... 48
CENTER................................................................................... 8 PES AUDIO - CABIN SYSTEM MODULE ..................................... 50
PES AUDIO - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - CABIN ..................... 10 PES AUDIO - CABIN CONFIGURATION TEST MODULE ............ 52
PES AUDIO - POWER INTERFACE - 1 ........................................ 16 PES AUDIO - VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM - AUDIO/
PES AUDIO - POWER INTERFACE - 2 ........................................ 18 KEYLINES ................................................................................ 56
PES AUDIO - AUDIO INTERFACE - 1 ........................................... 20 PES AUDIO - AEM OPERATION ................................................... 58
PES AUDIO - AUDIO INTERFACE - 2 ........................................... 22 PES AUDIO - AUDIO CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS ........................ 60
PES AUDIO - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER PASSENGER ZONE PES AUDIO - VIDEO AUDIO CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS ............ 62
INTERFACES ........................................................................... 24 PES AUDIO - ENTERTAINMENT/SERVICE CONTROLLER NOR-
COMPACT DISK REPRODUCER ................................................. 27 MAL AND ALTERNATE CIRCUITS ......................................... 64
SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION ................................................................ 30 PES AUDIO - ENTERTAINMENT/SERVICE CONTROLLER OP-
AUDIO DISTRIBUTION.................................................................. 32 ERATION ................................................................................. 66
PES AUDIO - AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT MULTIPLEXER ............ 34 PES AUDIO - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER 2 OPERATION ....... 68
PES AUDIO - ENTERTAINMENT/SERVICE CONTROLLER ........ 36 PES AUDIO - SEAT SCHEMATIC ................................................. 70
PES AUDIO - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER ................................ 38 PES AUDIO - PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES .............................. 72
PES AUDIO - SEAT ELECTRONICS UNIT ................................... 40

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 1
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT AUDIO SYSTEM -

INTRODUCTION (ECONOMY CLASS)

Due to a modification in KLM airplanes, incorporation of the MAS

2000 system, this section only contains audio entertainment
distribution in the economy class. Business class audio
entertainment will be discussed in another section of this training
manual.

The purpose of the passenger entertainment audio system (PES

audio) is to send entertainment audio to each passenger seat
location. Each passenger can make a selection to hear one of many
available audio channels.

23.34.0701 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 2
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0201 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 3
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 4
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT AUDIO SYSTEM

General Audio Interface

The main components of PES audio are: The AEM:

- Compact Disc Reproducers (CDR's) - Gets analog audio inputs from the CDR's and the video
- Audio entertainment multiplexer (AEM) entertainment system
- Audio Balancing Units (ABU's)
- Entertainment/service controller (ESC) - Converts the audio to a digital audio signal
- Two local area controllers (LAC's)
- One seat electronics unit (SEU)/interseat cable for each seat - Sends the multiplexed digital audio to the ESC
group
- One SEU termination plug for each column
23.34.0702A-006
- One digital passenger control unit (DPCU) for each seat
- Cabin configuration test module (CCTM)

The components which interface with the PES are the:

- Cabin system modules (CSMs)

- Enhanced Video System Control Unit (EVSCU)
- Passenger address controller (PAC)

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 5
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Audio Interface (cont)

The ESC sends the multiplexed digital audio to each of the two
LACs. During a passenger address announcement, an input from
the PAC replaces the entertainment/video audio, and passenger
address audio goes to all passenger headsets.

LAC 2 and 3 each interfaces with three columns of up to 31 SEUs in

the main passenger cabin.

The DPCU on each passenger seat armrest sends volume level and
channel selection data to the SEU. The SEU then converts the
selected channel to analog audio, and sends the audio to the DPCU
for the headsets. An SEU termination plug is at the end of a column
to maintain proper impedance characteristics of the transmission
cable.The CSM controls power to the SEUs and ENT T/R.

Alternate Circuit Selection

The ESC has a normal and an alternate circuit. Either circuit can do
all the ESC functions. The CCTM has a switch which lets the cabin
crew use the alternate circuit in the ESC if the normal circuit fails.

23.34.0702B-006

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 6
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0202 -006

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 7
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO COMPONENT LOCATIONS - MAIN EQUIPMENT

CENTER

The PES components and interface components in the main

equipment center are:

- Entertainment/service controller (ESC)

- AUDIO ENT - TAPE/MUX circuit breaker
- ENT/SERV-DC circuit breaker
- ENT/SERV-AC circuit breaker
- SEAT ELEX ZONE A/B circuit breaker
- SEAT ELEX ZONE C/D circuit breaker
- SEAT ELEX ZONE E circuit breaker
- SEAT ELEX UPR DK circuit breaker
- Audio entertainment relay, R7578
- Reading light relay - 1, R7575
- Seat electronics unit relay, R7574

23.34.0703 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 8
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0203 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 9
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - CABIN

The PES components and interface components in the passenger

cabin are:

- Local area controllers

- Seat electronics unit/interseat cable (one for each seat group)

- Digital passenger control unit (one for each seat)

- Cabin configuration test module

- Cabin system modules

- Compact Disc Reproducers

- Enhanced Video System Control Unit

- Audio Balancing Units

- Audio entertainment multiplexer (AEM)

23.34.0704 -005

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 10
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0204 -005

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 11
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 12
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0206 -012

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 13
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 14
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0207 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 15
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - POWER INTERFACE - 1

The ENT/SERV-AC circuit breaker supplies 115v ac to the

entertainment/service controller (ESC) and each local area controller
(LAC).

The cabin system modules (CSMs) get 115v ac from the LACs.

23.34.0708 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 16
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0208 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 17
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - POWER INTERFACE - 2

The AUDIO ENT-TAPE/MUX circuit breaker supplies 115v ac to the

audio entertainment multiplexer (AEM).

The PASSENGER SERVICES SYSTEM ON and OFF switches on

any CSM control the SEU relays, which send 115v ac from the
SEAT ELEX circuit breakers to the seat electronics units (SEUs).

The digital passenger control units (DPCUs) use 10v dc from the
SEUs.

23.34.0709 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 18
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0209 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 19
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - AUDIO INTERFACE - 1

23.34.0713 -001

AEM Interface

The audio entertainment multiplexer (AEM) gets 16 channels of

audio from the CD players. The output from CD players 2 and 3 go
via audio balancing units. The audio balancing units converts stereo
signals into mono signals. From the EVSCU the AEM receives three
channels of audio from the video entertainment system. Keylines
from the VSCU put the soundtrack mode into the AEM so it correctly
processes the audio as monaural, stereo or bi-lingual.

The AEM converts the audio to a digital format, multiplexes the

channels into their program sequence and sends the digital audio to
the entertainment/service controller (ESC).

ESC Interface

The ESC gets digital audio from the AEM and the passenger
address controller (PAC). When there is a passenger address (PA)
announcement, the PA digital audio overrides the entertainment
digital audio on all channels. The EPESC detects a PA
unnouncement and sends a pause control signal to the EVSCU, in
turn the EVSCU stops the CD players during the PA announcement.
The ESC sends the digital audio (entertainment or passenger
address) to the local area controllers (LACs).

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 20
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0213 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 21
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - AUDIO INTERFACE - 2

LAC-1 Interface

Digital audio from the ESC goes through the LAC to the area it
controls. The digital audio goes to the left, center and right columns.
A column can have up to 31 seat groups, with one seat electronics
unit (SEU) for each seat group.

SEU Interface

The SEU gets a digital input from each digital passenger control unit
(DPCU) in its seat group.

The input gives channel selection and volume control to the circuits
in the SEU. The SEU gets digital audio signals from the LAC or the
previous SEU, demultiplexes the selected channels, amplifies the
audio to the proper levels and sends the audio outputs to the
DPCUs. The passenger can monitor the audio with a headset
connected to a jack near the DPCU.

A SEU termination plug connects to the last SEU in a column to give

an impedance match to the transmission cable.

23.34.0714 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 22
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0214 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 23
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER PASSENGER ZONE

INTERFACES

Each local area controller (LAC) has interfaces with seat electronics
units (SEUs) in one or two passenger zones through interface
cables. Each LAC has interfaces with these passenger zones:

- LAC 2: Zones C and D

- LAC 3: Zone E

23.34.0716 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 24
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0216 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 25
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 26
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

COMPACT DISK REPRODUCER OPERATIONAL MODES

The CDR normally operates in one of five (5) modes: Play, Pause,
The Compact Disk Reproducer (CDR) provides superb audio quality Stop, Empty, and Test. Mode changes occur via the CMT or the
for MASC System 2000E applications. It does this by maintaining the controls on the front of the CDR.
digital signal from the compact disk being played to the seat box.
NOTE: The CDR has no power switch and is always considered
“ON” when it is operational (has primary 115 V 400Hz supplied to
The CDR handles the following functions: it).

Reproducing 8 monaural audio channels or four (4) stereo channels

(or any combination dictated by the software). The double-deck CDR PLAY MODE
is designed as a compact, tray-mounted unit.. It provides eight
parallel analog audio outputs and one multiplexed ADPCM digital The CDR enters this mode when powered on.
audio output. It can play eight (8) channels in mono or four (4) in
stereo for up to two (2) hours. The analog and digit audio outputs Play Mode Functions
are produced simultaneously. Each disk contains record mode
information, whether normal (four (4) channels) or extended (2 In this mode, all decks (when loaded with disks) are playing, starting
channels). The CDR contains two (2) identical CD decks which from the beginning. Any deck without a disk is stopped; if all decks
endlessly play CD-I disks only. (It rejects any ordinary compact disk are stopped, the CDR enters the STOP Mode.
as unreadable).

PAUSE MODE
The CDR reproduces 8 channels of audio:
In Pause Mode, the disks rotate (due to the CDR’s constant “ON”
Channels 1 through 4 on Deck 1 state) but do not play (there is no audio reproduction).
Channels 5 through 8 on Deck 2

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 27
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Pause Mode Functions EMPTY MODE

The CDR enters this mode from two sources: 1) when you send a The CDR enters this mode when the players are powered up and no
PAUSE Command for testing or 2) when you turn the PA system key disks are loaded. If a disk is loaded while the CDR is empty, it will
input (discrete input) to an active-low state. play the CD from the beginning, unlike the “Stop Mode” which will
commence from the last read data sector.
After the PAUSE command puts the CDR into the Pause Mode, the
RESUME command puts the CDR back into the Play Mode at the
point where it was interrupted. Therefore, the CDR is in Pause Mode TEST MODE
until Play Mode is resumed. With system key input, the CDR
remains in Pause Mode as long as this input is kept low; it releases The CDR enters this mode for maintenance purposes after receiving
the input into an inactive-open state, which puts the CDR back into a TEST Command. It re-enters normal operational mode after
Play Mode. receiving a NORMAL Command.

STOP MODE

The CDR enters this mode when all decks are stopped due to a stop
command being received from an external control unit such as the
EVSCU or EPESC.

Stop Mode Functions

If the CDR is in Play or Pause Mode and a STOP command is

received, it stops the disks and enters the Stop Mode. After a PLAY
command has been issued, the disks resume playing from the last
read data sector.

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 28
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 29
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION

Input Distribution Power Distribution

You can control the CDR from the CMT through the EVSCU an RS- The 115 VAC is routed to the A3 card from connector J1. The A3 card,
232C Type Port. contains two (2) switching regulator that provide the +5 VDC for the
digital signal circuits and the +7.5 VDC for the CD deck assembly. It
The CDR is designed to act on predetermined control commands sent also contains three (3) voltage regulators that provide +12 and -12
from the ECU. It will also return responses to certain data request VDC for the power lines to the analog audio amplifier circuits on the A2
commands. Both the commands and responses are in message form. card and +5 VDC to the analog signal circuits on the A2 card.
One command or response consists of several characters in
succession, and one character consists of 10 serial bits: one (1) start
bit, seven (7) data bits, one (1) even parity bit, and one (1) stop bit.

There are two (2) data lines between the ECU and the CDR. One is a
receive data line, which connects to the transmit data terminal of the
ECU; the other is a transmit data line, which connects to the receive
data terminal of the ECU. The CDR receives a command from the
ECU via the receive data line and returns a response to the ECU via
the transmit data line.

There are two (2) main command types: control and data request.
The CDR returns a response to the ECU when it receives a data request
command; it returns no response to a control command POWER ON,
POWER OFF, START, STOP, PAUSE, UNPAUSE, BOARDING
MUSIC CONTROL, BITE START and STATUS REQUEST, CDR
STATUS REQUEST, ELAPSED TIME REQUEST, etc.

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 30
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 31
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

AUDIO DISTRIBUTION

The CD signal processor reads the encoded CD data at 120% of

normal real-time playback speed. After EFM (encoded CD data)
signal demodulation, the CD data is routed to the CD Data
Processor. It applies control signals from the processor and sends
the CD data to the memory control chip. From there through an 8
Meg CD data buffer that holds up to 12 seconds of reproduced, 4-
channel analog audio in case of disk read failure or skip. The buffer
outputs data to the memory control chip, to be routed to the ADPCM
decoder and filter and output as filtered serial data. This data is sent
to a series of D/A converters and low pass filters and output as
analog audio outputs.

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 32
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 33
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT MULTIPLEXER

General Description

The audio entertainment multiplexer (AEM) gets audio from the CD

Players and the video entertainment system. It converts the audio to
digital audio. The AEM then multiplexes these signals and sends
them to the entertainment/service controller (ESC).

Characteristics

The AEM can have 16 audio inputs from the CD Players, ABU's and
3 audio inputs from the video entertainment system. The AEM needs
the configuration database to operate correctly.

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.34.0718 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 34
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0218 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 35
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - ENTERTAINMENT/SERVICE CONTROLLER

Purpose

The purpose of the entertainment/ service controller (ESC) is to get CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
and distribute data to the local area controllers (LACs). The ESC READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
gets: ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
- System configuration data from the central management unit BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.
(CMU)
23.34.0719 -001

- Digital audio from the audio entertainment multiplexer (AEM)

- Digital audio from the passenger address controller (PAC)

General Description

The ESC has two controller circuits, which are the same, called
normal and alternate. One controller circuit does all the functions of
the ESC. Only one controller circuit is on at a time. If there is a
failure of the normal controller, use the switch on the cabin
configuration test module (CCTM) to make the alternate controller
come on. The ESC needs the configuration database to operate
correctly.

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 36
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0219 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 37
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER

General Description

The local area controllers (LACs) send digital audio to the seat
electronic units (SEUs) within the area it controls. Each of the LACs
gets multiplexed digital audio from the entertainment/service
controller (ESC).

Characteristics

The local area controller has three independent assemblies.

One assembly does only functions of the passenger address

system, one does only functions of the cabin interphone system, and
one does only functions of passenger entertainment, passenger
service and cabin lighting systems.

The LAC needs the configuration database to operate correctly.

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.34.0720 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 38
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0220 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 39
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - SEAT ELECTRONICS UNIT

23.34.0722 -001

General Description

The seat electronics unit (SEU) gets a multiplexed digital audio

signal from its local area controller (LAC). Each digital passenger
control unit (DPCU) within the seat group sends volume control and
channel selection data to the SEU. The SEU decodes the selections,
and for the selected channels only, converts the digital audio to its
original analog form. The SEU then amplifies the audio to the
desired level and sends it to the DPCUs for monitoring.

There is one SEU for each seat group. (A seat group may have from
one to four seats.)

The SEU needs the configuration database to operate correctly.

Power

The PASSENGER SERVICES SYSTEM ON and OFF switches on

the cabin system module (CSM) control the power to the SEU.

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 40
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0222 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 41
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - SEAT ELECTRONICS UNIT INSTALLATION

The seat electronics unit (SEU) mounts on the structure of the seat
group as shown. Location may differ slightly with different seat
groups. Four fasteners allow quick removal and installation of the
SEU. A SEU cover protects the SEU and its connection cables from
damage.

The interseat cable goes into a channel that is parallel with the seat
track, which has a rigid plastic seat track cover.

23.34.0723 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 42
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0223 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 43
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - SEU INTERSEAT CABLE INSTALLATION

The SEU interseat cable is in a cable raceway that is next to the seat
track.

The seat track and cable raceway has a seat track cover for
protection. Remove the cover to access the SEU interseat cable.

23.34.0724 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 44
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0224 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 45
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - SEU TERMINATION PLUG

The last seat electronics unit (SEU) in a column must have the J2
connector terminated. The SEU termination plug contains a 75 ohm
resistor which matches the characteristic impedance of the
transmission cable. The SEU termination plug also has a wire
attached to a lug that fits in the seat track. It is the power ground for
the SEU column.

23.34.0725 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 46
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0225 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 47
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - DIGITAL PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT

Purpose

The digital passenger control unit (DPCU) provides the passengers

with controls that let a passenger choose an audio or video program
and adjust its volume level.

Operation

Two momentary-action channel select switches allow selection of

audio programs. The selected channel number shows on two LEDs.
Two momentary-action volume control switches let the passenger
adjust the audio volume level.

Operation of the other switches on the DPCU are for use with the
passenger service system.

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.34.0726 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 48
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0226 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 49
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - CABIN SYSTEM MODULE

Purpose

The cabin system module (CSM) controls the power to the: CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
- Entertainment tape reproducer (ENT T/R) ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
- Seat electronics units (SEUs) (REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.34.0728 -001
Operation

The AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT ON and OFF switches control power

to the ENT T/R.

The PASSENGER SERVICES SYSTEM ON and OFF switches

control power to the SEUs.

A light at the top left corner of each switch shows its selection.

Any CSM can do these functions.

Power

The CSM gets 115v ac from the local area controller (LAC) with
which it has interfaces.

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 50
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0228 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 51
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - CABIN CONFIGURATION TEST MODULE

General Description

For the passenger entertainment audio system (PES audio) the When this occurs, the alternate circuit does all ESC functions.
cabin configuration test module (CCTM) has switches to:
CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
- Do a PES test READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
- Install the configuration database ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
- Install operational software (REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
- Make the alternate circuit in the entertainment/service controller BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.
(ESC) come on
23.34.0729 -001

Normal/Alternate Circuit Selection

The CCTM has a passenger services alternate system switch. The

switch sends a discrete to the ESC to make either the normal or the
alternate controller circuits come on.

Usually, the normal circuit in the ESC is on. Push the PASSENGER
SERVICES switch to:

- Make the alternate circuit come on

- Make the normal circuit go off
- Make a light in the switch come on

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 52
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0229 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 53
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 54
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0230 -004

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 55
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM - AUDIO/

KEYLINES

The enhanced video system control unit (EVSCU) can supplies

three audio programs to the audio entertainment multiplexer (AEM).
A video program can have mono, stereo or bi-lingual audio outputs.
A mono program uses only channel A for audio, a stereo or
bi-lingual program uses both channels A and B for audio.

All audio goes to the A/D converter within the AEM, which converts it
to digital audio.

The AEM gets video entertainment keylines. They tell the AEM if the
soundtrack mode of video audio inputs are mono, stereo, bi-lingual,
or if there are audio signals present.

The keylines are grouped into three pairs, one pair for each video
program. The combination of ground and open discretes on the
keylines tells the AEM the soundtrack mode.

The table shows an example of the audio output and keyline states
for the different soundtrack modes. An example is channels 1A and
1B.

23.34.0732 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 56
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0232 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 57
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - AEM OPERATION

Operation Video Keylines

The audio entertainment multiplexer (AEM) can get up to sixteen The EVSCU supplies six channels of audio from up to three
channels of audio from the CD players, and six channels of audio separate video sources (two channels for each source).
from theenhanced video system control unit (EVSCU).
Video entertainment keylines to the AEM discrete input buffer
All audio inputs go to an A/D converter which converts the audio represent the video audio soundtrack mode (mono, stereo, bi-lingual
inputs into digital audio, and sends it to a digital audio processor. or no audio). The keyline data goes to the AEM microprocessor. The
microprocessor sends the data to the digital audio processor, which
The microprocessor tells the digital audio processor to: arranges the video audio on each output to match the selections in
the configuration database.
- Put the entertainment audio into the correct sequence. The audio
sequence is the same for each of the outputs (one output per
local area controller). Synchronization

The digital audio processor outputs are manchester encoded. They When it gets a set of sync pulses from the ESC, the AEM sends a
go to the ESC. frame of digital audio data. This allows the ESC to put PA audio into
the correct part of the data sequence when there is a PA
announcement.

23.34.0733B-002

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 58
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0233 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 59
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - AUDIO CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS

The airplane configuration system (ACS) tells the audio

entertainment multiplexer (AEM) which audio inputs to assign to the
channel selections on the digital passenger control units (DPCUs).

The graphic shows an example of the channel assignments. For

each monaural DPCU selection, there must be one input. There
must be two inputs for each stereo channel. In the example, when
channel number 6 is on a DPCU display, entertainment tape
reproducer audio channels eight and ten go to that DPCU as a
stereo audio signal.

If the video system is on, the AEM replaces one or more of the audio
channels with video audio.

23.34.0734 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 60
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0234 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 61
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - VIDEO AUDIO CHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS

The airplane configuration system (ACS) tells the audio

entertainment multiplexer (AEM) which video audio inputs to assign
to the channel selections on the digital passenger control units
(DPCUs).

The graphic shows an example of the channel assignments. In the

example, when channel number 4 is on a DPCU display in zone E
(connected to LAC 3), video audio channel three (MOVIE 3) goes to
that DPCU as a monaural audio signal. Also in the example, video
audio source one (MOVIE 1) supplies dual language audio. This
audio goes to DPCU channels one and two for the DPCUs which
interface with LACs 1 and 4.

If the video system is off, the AEM sends entertainment audio on all
DPCU channels.

23.34.0735 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 62
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0235 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 63
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - ENTERTAINMENT/SERVICE CONTROLLER

NORMAL AND ALTERNATE CIRCUITS

The entertainment/service controller (ESC) has these two fully

redundant controller circuits:

- Normal
- Alternate

Each circuit can do all ESC functions. All interfaces with the ESC
connect in parallel to both circuits.

Normally, the passenger services switch on the cabin configuration

test module (CCTM) is open. When it is open, it sends an open
discrete to an inverter on the motherboard of the ESC (an open is a
logic one). This sends a logic zero to switch S1. The switch sends
28v dc to the normal controller circuit. When the passenger services
switch closes, it sends a ground discrete from the ESC back to the
ESC to an inverter on the motherboard (a ground is a logic zero).
This sends a logic one to switch S1. The switch sends 28v dc to the
alternate controller and removes power from the normal circuit.
Thus, the alternate circuit now does all the ESC functions.

23.34.0736 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 64
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0236 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 65
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - ENTERTAINMENT/SERVICE CONTROLLER

OPERATION

General ESC Controller Operation

The entertainment/service controller (ESC) gets digital audio from The normal and alternate circuit are identical in their operation,
the audio entertainment multiplexer (AEM) and the passenger however, only one circuit operates at a time. The motherboard
address controller (PAC). It sends these signals to the local area connects all controller inputs and outputs. Usually, the normal circuit
controllers (LACs). is active. The alternate circuit operates in the same way as the
normal circuit.

ESC Audio Processor

23.34.0737 -001

The audio processor gets digital audio from the AEM and the PAC.
The AEM sends four inputs. Each input has entertainment audio and
video audio. The PAC supplies PA announcements which override
audio on all channels within the area of the announcement.

The audio processor processes the digital audio inputs and sends
the processed digital audio to the four local area controllers (LACs).

Synchronization between the AEM and ESC comes from a sync

signal from the passenger address controller (PAC) via the cabin
interphone controller (CIC).

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 66
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0237 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 67
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER 2 OPERATION

Each local area controller (LAC) does the same basic functions, so
only LAC 1 operation is discussed.

Digital audio from the entertainment/service controller (ESC) goes to

the digital audio receiver/transmitter circuit in the LAC. The LAC then
sends the digital audio to each column of seat electronics units
(SEUs) in the LAC's area of control.

23.34.0738 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 68
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0238 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 69
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - SEAT SCHEMATIC

Digitial audio from the local area controller (LAC) goes to the seat
electronics units (SEUs). The digital audio and configuration data
input also goes to the next SEU in the column.

Use the up down buttons on the digital passenger control unit

(DPCU) to:

- Make an audio channel selection

- Set the volume of the audio

The keypad sends the data to the DPCU microprocessor which

sends the selections to the SEU microprocessor.

The LAC sends the SEU microprocessor data with the number of
channels available and the soundtrack mode. This data goes to the:

- DPCU microprocessor to make the channel display.

- SEU microprocessor so that it knows which channel or channels

the SEU D/A converter should convert to analog audio. After the
digital audio becomes an analog signal, the audio goes to an
attenuator which adjusts the volume level. The audio then goes to
the electrical and/or pneumatic jacks in or near the DPCU.

23.34.0739 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 70
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0239 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 71
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES AUDIO - PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES

The passenger entertainment audio system (PES audio) uses the

ACESS configuration database to control some PES audio
functions.

All ACESS systems use part of the configuration database. For PES
audio, this database has data for:

- Entertainment audio channel assignments

- Video audio channel assignments

23.34.0740 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 72
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.34.0240 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 73
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Audio Economy Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-34

Issue: 1 Page 74
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT OVERHEAD VIDEO SYSTEM - AIRSHOW - DIGITAL INTERFACE ................................................. 36

INTRODUCTION ...................................................................... 2 PES VIDEO - SIXTEEN-INCH VIDEO MONITOR .......................... 40
PES OVERHEAD VIDEO SYSTEM ............................................... 4 PES VIDEO-TWENTY-FIVE INCH VIDEO MONITOR ................... 42
PES OVERHEAD VIDEO - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 1 ......... 6 7-INCH LCD MONITOR WITH POWER SUPPLY ......................... 44
PES VIDEO - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 2 ............................... 8 CMT DESCRIPTION ...................................................................... 46
PES OVERHEAD VIDEO - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 3 ......... 10 ENHANCED PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
VIDEO CONTROL CENTER (VCC) .............................................. 12 CONTROLLER (EPESC) ........................................................... 48
PES VIDEO - VIDEO ZONES AND AREAS ................................... 14 EPESC BLOCK DIAGRAM ............................................................ 50
PES OVERHEAD VIDEO - POWER - FORWARD VIDEO ZONE 16 ENHANCED VIDEO SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT (EVSCU) ............ 52
PES VIDEO – OVERHEAD POWER - AFT VIDEO ZONE ............ 18 EVSCU SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION .................................................... 55
PES OVERHEAD VIDEO – INTERFACE BLOCK DIAGRAM ........ 20 CMS MEMORY EXPANSION UNIT II (CMEU II) .............................. 58
PES OVERHEAD VIDEO - VIDEO DISTRIBUTION UNIT INTER- LOCAL AREA NETWORK HUB (LANHUB) .................................... 60
FACE - FORWARD/AFT VIDEO ZONE ................................... 22 TOKEN RING ................................................................................. 62
PES OVERHEAD VIDEO – ENHANCED VIDEO SYSTEM CON- VIDEO MODULATION UNIT (VMU) ................................................ 64
TROL UNIT - AUDIO OUTPUTS ............................................... 26 VMU DESCRIPTION ...................................................................... 66
PES VIDEO – CABIN MANAGEMENT TERMINAL ......................... 28 TAPPING UNITS ............................................................................. 68
PES VIDEO - VIDEO DISTRIBUTION UNIT AND TERMINATION VIDEO DISTRIBUTION UNIT (VDU) ............................................... 70
PLUG ........................................................................................ 30 S-VHS VTP SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION ............................................. 73
PES - VIDEO TAPE PLAYERS. ..................................................... 33 VIDEO/AUDIO SEAT ELECTRONIC BOX (VASEB) ...................... 76

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 1
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT OVERHEAD VIDEO SYSTEM -

INTRODUCTION

The passenger entertainment overhead video system supplies video

entertainment to the passengers.

Video is shown on monitors.

Audio goes to the passenger address system and/or to headphones

at each seat.

23.32.0701 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 2
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0201 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 3
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES OVERHEAD VIDEO SYSTEM

The video control center (VCC) is the central location for operation
and control of the video system.

The basic core structure of the MAS System 2000E consists of the
following devices:

- Cabin Management Terminal (CMT)

- Memory Expansion Unit (CMEU)
- Enhanced Video System Control Unit (EVSCU)
- Enhanced Passenger Entertainment System Controller (EPESC)

The EVSCU sends a VIDEO IN USE signal to the cabin interphone

system for display in the flight deck.

When cabin decompression occurs the decompression relay sends

a discrete to the EPESC. This causes the EPESC to remove power
from all video components.

23.32.0702 -009

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 4
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0202 -009

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 5
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES OVERHEAD VIDEO - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 1

The video control center (VCC) is on the main deck under the VDU 8 is at ST 1475 LBL 10.
stairway to the upper deck and contains the:
VDU 9 is at ST 1630 LBL 15.
- Enhanced video system control unit (EVSCU)
- Video tape players (PVPs and OVP) VDU 10 is at ST 1475 LBL 10.
- Central management terminal (CMT)
- Enhanced passenger entertainment system controller (EPESC) VDU 11 is at ST 2030 LBL 10.
- Central memory expansion unit (CMEU)
VDU UD - 1 is at ST 630 RBL 5.
The video distribution units (VDU) are numbered based on their
position in the airplane. All main deck VDUs are at water line (WL)
23.32.0703 -009
300, all UD VDUs are at WL 395. Their stations (ST) and buttock
lines (BL) are as follows.

VDU 1 is at ST 445 BL 0.

VDU 2 is at ST 510 LBL 10.

VDU 4 is at ST 800 LBL 60.

VDU 5 is at ST 995 LBL 10.

VDU 6 is at ST 1165 LBL 15.

VDU 7 is at ST 1310 LBL 15.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 6
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0203 -009

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 7
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES VIDEO - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 2

The PES overhead video monitors (MON) are in the passenger MON 14 is at station 1360 WL 295 RBL 50.
cabin.
MON 15 is at station 1530 WL 295 LBL 50.
Monitor 1 is a 25-inch monitor and is at station 180 WL 295 LBL 50.
MON 16 is at station 1530 WL 295 RBL 50.
There are twenty-one 16-inch monitors. Their station, WL and BL are
as follows. MON 17 is at station 1690 WL 295 LBL 60.

MON 3 is at station 470 WL 295 RBL 50. MON 18 is at station 1690 WL 295 RBL 60.

MON 5 is at station 670 WL 295 LBL 50. MON 19 is at station 1840 WL 295 LBL 50.

MON 7 is at station 810 WL 295 LBL 60. MON 20 is at station 1840 WL 295 RBL 50.

MON 8 is at station 810 WL 295 RBL 60. MON 21 is at station 2050 WL 295 LBL50.

MON 9 is at station 1060 WL 295 LBL 50. MON 22 is at station 2050 WL 295 RBL 50.

MON 10 is at station 1060 WL 295 RBL 50. MON 23 is at station 690 WL 360 LBL 15.

MON 11 is at station 1160 WL 295 LBL 50. MON 24 is at station 450 WL 360 RBL 15.

MON 12 is at station 1160 WL 295 RBL 50. MON 25 is at station 410 WL 360 RBL 20.

23.32.0704 -009
MON 13 is at station 1360 WL 295 LBL 50.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 8
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0204 -009

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 9
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES OVERHEAD VIDEO - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - 3

The video components in the main equipment center are the:

- Video control center (VCC) dc circuit breaker

- PWS ac circuit breaker

- Video zone ac circuit breakers

23.32.0705 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 10
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0205 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 11
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

VIDEO CONTROL CENTER (VCC)

The VCC is the main control center for System 2000E. Located
within the VCC are most of the system control LRUs. The CMT,
CMEU, EVSCU, VMU, FDDU, Keyboard, CDRs and VCPs are
located in the VCC. Control of the system is accomplished by the
Flight Attendants using the Cabin Management Terminal (CMT)
within the VCC. Assigning selected VCP outputs to overhead
displays in different aircraft zones, previewing video and audio
programs, control of Airshow, and the viewing of system status is
accomplished at the CMT.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 12
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0207 -008

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 13
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES VIDEO - VIDEO ZONES AND AREAS

Zones

The video system is divided into two zones, the forward and aft video
zones.

All video components located forward of the Purser work station and
in the upper deck are in the forward video zone. All video
components located aft of the Purser work station are in the aft video
zone.

Areas

The PES overhead video has four separate video areas. Areas 1, 2
and 3 can show different video programs.

The upper deck (U/D) area is paired with area 2, and shows the
same video program as that area.

23.32.0708 -009

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 14
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0208 -009

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 15
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES OVERHEAD VIDEO - POWER - FORWARD VIDEO ZONE

Purser Work Station (PWS) Forward Video Zone

The PWS - AC circuit breaker supplies 115v ac to the: The VIDEO ZONE A - AC circuit breaker supplies 115v ac to:

- Enhanced video system control unit (EVSCU) - Video distribution unit (VDU) 1
- Cabin management terminal (CMT) - Monitor 1 and 23 (through VDU 1)
- Enhanced passenger entertainment system controller (EPESC)
- Central memory expansion unit (CMEU) The VIDEO ZONE B - AC circuit breaker supplies 115v ac to:
- LAN HUB
- Video modulator units (VMU’s) - VDU 2
- Video/audio seat electronic boxes (VASEB’s) - Monitors 3 and 5 (through VDU 2)
- Enhanced area distribution boxes (EADB’s)
- Compact disc players The VIDEO ZONE C - AC circuit breaker supplies 115v ac to:
- Video tape reproducer VTR
- VDU 4
The VIDEO CONT CTR - DC circuit breaker supplies 28v dc to the - Monitors 7 and 8 (through VDU 4)
master power switch.
The VIDEO ZONE U/D - AC circuit breaker supplies 115v ac to:
The decompression relay R36 sends a discrete to the EVSCU if
cabin decompression occurs. The EVSCU removes power from all - VDU UD - 1
monitors when it gets the discrete. - Monitors 24 and 25 (through VDU UD - 1)

23.32.0709 -009

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 16
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0209 -009

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 17
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES VIDEO – OVERHEAD POWER - AFT VIDEO ZONE

The VIDEO ZONE C - AC circuit breaker supplies 115v ac to:

- VDU 5
- Monitors 9 and 10 (through VDU 5)
- VDU 6 (through VDU 5)
- Monitors 11 and 12 (through VDUs 5 and 6)

The VIDEO ZONE D - AC circuit breaker supplies 115v ac to:

- VDU 7
- Monitors 13 and 14 (through VDU 7)
- VDU 8 (through VDU 7)
- Monitors 15 and 16 (through VDUs 7 and 8)

The VIDEO ZONE E - AC circuit breaker supplies 115v ac to:

- VDU 9
- Monitors 17 and 18 (through VDU 9)
- VDU 10 (through VDU 9)
- Monitors 19 and 20 (through VDUs 9 and 10)
- VDU 11
- Monitors 21 and 22 (through VDU 11)

23.32.0710 -008

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 18
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0210 -008

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 19
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES OVERHEAD VIDEO – INTERFACE BLOCK DIAGRAM

EVSCU

The enhanced video system control unit (EVSCU):

- Gets audio from the overhead video player and from personal
video player 12.

- Sends control commands to the video players, digital interface

unit (flight tracking), video modulator units, tapping units and video
distribution units.

- Sends PA audio and keylines to the PAC.

- Sends audio and keylines to the AEM.

OVP/PVP 12

The video players send two stereo audio channels to the EVSCU.

23.32.0711 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 20
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0211 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 21
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES OVERHEAD VIDEO - VIDEO DISTRIBUTION UNIT

INTERFACE - FORWARD/AFT VIDEO ZONE

VMU VDUs

The VMU sends video to the tapping units, control signals from the The VDU receives data and three channels of video from the VBLIU
EVSCU determine what video signal is selected to go to the video or previous VDU.
balancing line interface units. From the VBLIU the video signals go to
the first VDU in the forward and aft video zones. Data is sent on The VDU sends one channel of video, 28 volts dc as an ON
bi-directional data lines. The data sent is: CONTROL signal to the monitors.

- Command data The monitors send an on indication (ON IND) discrete to the VDUs
when they are energized.
- Built-in test equipment (BITE) test commands
The data and all three channels of video are sent to the next VDU or
The VDUs send system status and BITE test results to the EVSCU a VDU termination plug, if the VDU is the last VDU in a column.
on the data lines.
23.32.0712 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 22
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0212 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 23
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 24
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 25
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES OVERHEAD VIDEO – ENHANCED VIDEO SYSTEM

CONTROL UNIT - AUDIO OUTPUTS

The EVSCU sends the key lines and audio for distribution on the
cabin to the:

- Audio entertainment multiplexer (AEM)

- Passenger address controller (PAC)

- Audio to the EPESC

The EVSCU sends to the AEM:

- Two channels of audio for the VTR in stereo format.

The EVSCU sends to the PAC the audio for the 3 PA areas set at the
CMT.

23.32.0713 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 26
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0213 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 27
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES VIDEO – CABIN MANAGEMENT TERMINAL

General

The Cabin Management Terminal (CMT) controls the PES overhead The ENTER selection sets the selection performed by any other
video. selection.

Controls and Indications The PA VOLUME selection control the PA volume level for PA areas
when the PA function is set. Push the up arrow to increase PA
The MASTER POWER switch controls power to the MAS 2000 volume. Push the down arrow to decrease PA volume.
system.
The PLAY, STOP, FFWD and REW selections control the OVP or
All other controls, the line select keys, of the CMT are momentary PVP 12.
switches that control the functions of the system. The CMT also has
a touch screen to control the system. The CMT VOLUME selection control the audio level of the CMT.

23.32.0714 -010
The ZONE selection sets the aircraft viewing areas.

The SOURCE selection sets the video sources for the viewing
areas.

The CHANNEL selection selects preview video to the CMT.

The PA selection sets the audio channel for the passenger address
areas.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 28
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0214 -010

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 29
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES VIDEO - VIDEO DISTRIBUTION UNIT AND TERMINATION

PLUG

Purpose Termination Plug

The video distribution unit (VDU) performs these functions: The termination plug is connected to the last VDU in each video
zone. It has:
- Channel selection
- ON/OFF control - Three 75 ohm resistors for impeadance matching of video lines.
- Amplification of video signals
- Transfer of video and data - One jumper connection for the data lines.

23.32.0716 -001

Features

Each VDU has:

- Three quick disconnect jacks. Two for monitor connections and

one for a video and data line to the next VDU or termination plug.

- One plug for a video and data line from the previous VDU.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 30
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0216 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 31
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 32
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES - VIDEO TAPE PLAYERS.

Purpose Mode Controls

The video tape players (OVP, PVP 12) provides recorded video and There are five switches and three indicator lights for control of the
audio signals. VTP operating mode. There is no power switch.

REW (rewind), PLAY and FF (fast forward) indicators - These lights

General indicate the VTP operating modes. Mode indications are as follows:

The VTP plays video cassettes in VHS or S-VHS format. They may - Off; all lights off
be recorded using NTSC or PAL standard. The VTP provides one - STOP; all lights off
video and four audio outputs. This allows for stereo, bilingual audio. - REW; REW on, PLAY and FF off
- FF; FF on, REW and PLAY off
The audio outputs are channels: - PLAY; PLAY on, REW and FF off
- CUE; PLAY and FF on, REW off
- 1; hi-fi (FM) audio channel 1 - REVIEW; REW and PLAY on, FF off
- 2; hi-fi (FM) audio channel 2 - PAUSE; PLAY on, REW and FF off
- 3; normal audio channel 1
- 4; normal audio channel 2 REW, PLAY, FF, and STOP switches - control operating mode of the
VTP tape transport. Pressing REW or FF while in PLAY mode enters
The VTP has a random access function when used with specially review or cue mode.
encoded tapes. Random access may be controlled by an external
device such as the Cabin Managent Terminal (CMT) or by front panel
controls. If the random access function is initiated by the front panel
controls, remote control operation is not possible.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 33
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Mode Controls (cont)

EJECT - Pressing this switch ejects the tape. EJECT works even if - Remaining time in SHOW TIME mode. Time appears in the first
the VTP is off. If pressed while off, the VTP turns on, ejects the tape, three digits.
and then turns off.
PROGRAM, RA PLAYING, and REMAINING TIME lights - indicate the
current mode of the random access function.
Digital Display and Mode Lights

A five digit display is used as an indicator for several operations. The Status Lights
display is divided into two groups (3-digit and 2-digit). The display
provides the following indications: POWER light - on when power is applied to the VTP.

- Blank when loaded with an ordinary tape. TAPE IN light - on when a tape is in the VTR. May be on whether the
VTR is on or off.
- 000-00 when a newly loaded tape is identified as a multi-program
tape. STANDBY light - on when drying operation is on. VTR can not be
used until light turns off. Drying process takes a minimum of 30
- Group, program order, and segment number in PROGRAM minutes.
mode. The first digit is the group (hexidecimal). The second and
third digits are the program order (1-24). The fourth and fifth digits
are the segment (1-24).

- Group, next segment, and current segment in RA (random

access) PLAYING mode. The first digit is the group. The second
and third digits are the next segment. The fourth and fifth digits
are the current segment.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 34
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 35
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

AIRSHOW - DIGITAL INTERFACE

General Inputs

The digital interface unit (DIU) is a computer used to convert airplane The Airshow DIU receives data from the right air data computer, left
data into interesting and useful flight information for the passengers. flight management computer and ACARS.

The video signal from the DIU is sent through a video transformer to
video modulator unit 1 for distribution. The video produced by the Outputs
DIU is unique to the airline and may be reprogrammed using the
Cabin Management Terminal (CMT) The DIU sends out video signals to display maps, points of interest
and information about the flight. Ground speed, latitude, longitude,
altitude, wind speed, ground speed, and time to destination are
Power display options.

28 volts dc is supplied from the FLIGHT TRACKING circuit breaker

on the P180 circuit breaker panel.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 36
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 37
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 38
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 39
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES VIDEO - SIXTEEN-INCH VIDEO MONITOR

Purpose

The sixteen-inch video monitor shows video from the video source
set at the VSCU.

Features

Each sixteen-inch monitor has these side panel controls:

- Vertical hold knob to align image on the monitor screen

- Brightness control knob to adjust the brightness of image

- Hue (tint) knob to adjust one color intensity relative to other colors

- Color control knob to adjust all colors

- Pix knob to adjust for sharp image

23.32.0721 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 40
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0221 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 41
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES VIDEO-TWENTY-FIVE INCH VIDEO MONITOR

General

The twenty-five inch monitor shows video from the video source set
at the VSCU.

Features

The front panel controls and indicators for the twenty-five inch video
monitor are:

- The HUE adjustment for color balance

- The COLOR adjustment for color intensity
- The BRIGHT adjustment for picture brightness
- The SHARPNESS adjustment for contrast
- The CONTROL key which illuminates the controls
- The STANDARD indicator which shows the TV standard used on
the PES video system.

23.32.0723 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 42
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.32.0223 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 43
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

7-INCH LCD MONITOR WITH POWER SUPPLY

Purpose Power Supply

Each monitor shows video images from the selected video source. The power supply unit has the power switching circuits, a rectifier
circuit, and a video amplifier. The rectifier creates +18V operating
power for the monitor.
Features
The power supply is normally mounted behind a trim panel, close to
The monitor has a 7-inch liquid crystal display (LCD) color screen. It the monitor.
requires 18v dc input power. Power is delivered by a power supply
physically attached to the back of the monitor shroud. This power
supply receives 115v ac, 400 hz. Wiring diagrams show only a 115v
ac, 400 hz input.

The monitor processes NTSC signals only. It is sealed against liquid

spillage.

The monitor is designed to be mounted on cabin walls.

A single connector supplies video and control signals. Adjustment

controls are on the bottom of the monitor.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 44
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 45
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CMT DESCRIPTION

The CMT has a modular design with a core processing unit Ventilation Slots - The ventilation slots in the CMT allow air to flow
consisting of a 33MHz 80486SX processor with eight (8) Megs of and minimize the operating temperature. Keep these slots clear of
RAM expandable to 64 Megs, four (4) serial ports, a Centronics port, obstructions and insert no objects into the ventilation slots or fans
a floppy disk interface, keyboard controller, and 80 MB Flash Drive that provide ventilation to the CMT.
(used with the CMT mass storage device. This additional storage is
useful for adding CMT application software and storing BITE failures Line Select Keys - There are sixteen (16) Line Select Keys (LSK),
and statistical data). The CMT features a 10" color LCD display with with eight (8) on each side of the CMT screen. (Refer to the LSKs to
high-speed graphical user interaction capability via either twenty-four as R1 through R8 or L1 through L8, the right and left sides,
(24) Line Select Keys (LSK) (eight (8) on each vertical side and eight respectively. For example: L1 is the top left LSK and R1 is the top
(8) horizontal) or touch screen. right LSK.)

The CMT communicates with other main controllers (such as Function Call-Out - Throughout the CMT menus, Function Call-Outs
EVSCU, EPESC, CMEU) via a 16 MHz Token Ring LAN. External (FCO) appear adjacent to the LSKs. You can activate the FCO by
CMT interfaces include an RS-232 port, audio jack, and keyboard selecting the LSK adjacent to it. When the FCO is displayed with an
connector. A dual-pin audio jack is built into the CMT for audio arrow, you can select the next adjacent LSK to go to another CMT
preview. Screen. When an asterisk is displayed, you can select the adjacent
LSK to execute the FCO. Green FCO text indicates an active state;
The CMT core processing unit uses a modified MS-DOS 5.0 and a black text indicates an inactive state.
modified Windows 3.1 customized for System 2000E applications.
The CMT keyboard and disk drive unit is installed for use with future Function Select Keys - There are eight (8) Function Select Keys
configurations. The CMT database can store up to twelve (12) (FSK), arranged horizontally at the bottom of the CMT Screen.
different A/C configurations for audio/video and PA Zoning. (Refer to the FSKs as F1 through F8, with the left-most FSK being
F1.)
When the system is powered ON, the CMT initializes and a MAS
Logo is displayed with a countdown to initialization while it loads the Headphone Jacks - These receive a two-prong head-phone plug for
operational program. After initialization, the system shows the monitoring audio programs from the CMT.
appropriate airline Logo on the screen.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 46
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 47
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ENHANCED PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

CONTROLLER (EPESC)

The EPESC is the main system controller for the Passenger

Entertainment System (PES) function of System 2000E.

The EPESC communicates with the seat network over the Token
Ring via the Enhanced Area Distribution Boxes (EADB) and provides
the means for controlling and configuring the PES. The EPESC also
communicates with the System Controllers (CMT, EVSCU, CMEU)
through a Token Ring LAN. The LAN is used for configuration and
code download as well as for control and BITE communications.

The EPESC can support up to six (6) PA inputs to system

interfaces.

The EPESC communicates with the following systems and LRUs:

VCC System controller LRUs (CMT, CMEU, EVSCU) over Token

Ring LAN. Seat LAN through EADBs.

Enhancements to the EPESC include the extension of the token ring

to the EADB for high-speed, bi-directional data transfer.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 48
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 49
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

EPESC BLOCK DIAGRAM EPESC FUNCTIONS

The EPESC digitizes and compresses analog audio inputs from Audio Distribution - The EPESC receives analog audio from the PAC
audio reproducers (A/R) and analog PA audio signals. The EPESC and 3 IOEU’s.
also interfaces with the Passenger Address system. This interface
can support up to six (6) passenger address zones (either VOX or The EPESC communicates with the following systems and LRUs:
keyline) on six (6) twisted-pair inputs.
VCC System controller LRUs (CMT, CMEU, EVSCU) over Token
The EPESC accepts digitized audio via a serial bit stream. The unit Ring LAN.
is capable of receiving 72 channels of digitized audio via a coaxial
cable input. DIU via RS-485 databus

The EPESC formats all data available to it such as entertainment Seat LAN via Token Ring LAN network through the EADBs.
audio, PA audio and distributes it to the seat network.

Communication from the EPESC to the seat network is provided by

the Token Ring LAN, which connects all the major controllers in
System 2000E. The EPESC communicates to the EADBs via a
single, twisted-pair EPESC-EADB Data 1 Bus.

Configuration, BITE, and other types of commands received from

other systems are received by the EPESC to execute or initiate the
appropriate functions. BITE is performed automatically upon power
on and upon request by the CMT. The EPESC maintains back-up
power for a minimum of 200 ms during system power interruptions.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 50
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 51
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ENHANCED VIDEO SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT (EVSCU)

The EVSCU receives audio from the CDRs and video-audio from the
VCPs. This audio will be output as a multiplexed signal to the
EPESC for distribution to the seat network.

The EVSCU can output 3 channels of PA video-audio and 3 Video PA

keylines when Video PA is selected at the CMT.

The EVSCU provides the central control for the video subsystem
portions of System 2000E. The EVSCU collects video audio, and
compact disk (CD) audio programs and distributes them to the seat
distribution network via the EPESC. Control of the MASC Video
Cassette Players (VCP), MASC CD Reproducers (CDRs), Video
Modulator Unit (VMU), Video Distribution Units (VDUs) and Tapping
Units (TUs) is also provided by the EVSCU.

The Cabin Management Terminal (CMT) is the user interface which

controls the EVSCU. Preview video and audio may be received at
the CMT via a seat box (VASEB). The CMT can request BITE
information from the EVSCU on all units the EVSCU controls (i.e.,
VDUs, TUs, VMUs, VCPs CDRs, etc.). BITE is performed
automatically on power up or upon request from the CMT or CMEU.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 52
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 53
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 54
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

EVSCU SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION

Audio Distribution

The EVSCU is capable of accepting up to forty-eight (48) analog The EVSCU communicates with the following LRUs:
audio channels from VCPs or Audio Reproducers (A/Rs - CDRs)
and up to forty-eight (48) digital channels from CDRs, to a maximum VCPs: The EVSCU communicates with the VCPs on an RS-232.
of seventy-two (72) channels total. The analog audio signals are Each VCP will have its’ own dedicated RS-232 port. The EVSCU
digitized in the EVSCU and are compressed from sixteen (16) bits to receives function control commands from the CMT (user input).
four (4) data bits using the proprietary technique for data
compression. CDRs: The EVSCU communicates with the CDRs on an RS-232.
Each CDR will have its’ own dedicated RS-232 port.
The EVSCU receives audio from the CDRs and video-audio from the
VCPs. CMT: The EVSCU and CMT communicate via a Token Ring LAN.
The CMT sends formatted user commands to the EVSCU for
The EVSCU provides all video audio PA outputs from System 2000E, processing and execution.
and is capable of supporting up to six (6) different PA zones at any
one time.
Video Distribution Units (VDUs):

Communications The EVSCU communicates with the VDU on a RS-485 data bus
(Data 1 bus or Data 2 bus). The Data Bus 2 is used as a back-up in
Communication from the EVSCU is provided through several case of a Data Bus 1 failure.
avenues. The EVSCU communicates to other System 2000E control
units over the Token Ring Local Area Network.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 55
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Tapping Units (TU)

The EVSCU communicates with the TU on a RS-485 data bus (Data

1 bus or Data 2 bus). The Data Bus 2 is used as a back-up in case
of a Data Bus 1 failure.

The EVSCU sends commands to the TUs/VDUs for Video channel

selection and Monitor ON/OFF control.

The EVSCU sends the BITE command to, and receives the BITE
result from, the TUs/VDUs. The TUs/VDUs are periodically polled by
the EVSCU. If they do not respond, they will retract any monitors
mounted in this manner and shut down.

Video Modulation Unit (VMU)

The EVSCU communicates with the VMU to assign video channel

frequencies and monitor status and perform BITE functions.

Commands and BITE information are sent over an RS-232 data bus
between the EVSCU and the VMU.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 56
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 57
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CMS MEMORY EXPANSION UNIT II (CMEU II)

The CMEU II works as a system file server that supports a variety of The CMEU II maintains backup power for a minimum of 11 seconds
functions, including the downloading of the database data and during system power interruptions so as to eliminate unnecessary
application software to the seat network, data storage and retrieval, reset of system parameters.
BITE service, seat addressing service and configuration control. It
supports interactive video functions, such as sales via electronic The CMEU II contains a 175 MB flash drive to store the Operating
catalog viewing. The CMEU II also provides a memory expansion System software and two (2) mirrored 2.1 GB hard disk drives to
function to the CMT via the Token Ring LAN. Nintendo games (if store a large amount of information (data and programs). The drive
available) are stored and downloaded from the CMEU II. array uses the mirrored drives to achieve greater reliability.

CMEU II DESCRIPTION CMEU II FUNCTIONS

The CMEU is a core component of the System 2000E designed to The CMEU supports a variety of functions, including database and
provide memory storage for software applications and cabin application software download to the seat network and data storage
management data. The CMEU also stores the database and BITE and retrieval. The CMEU provides the following functions:
functions for itself and other system LRUs.
Supports In-Flight Statistics Data Collection. The CMEU has the
The CMEU II has seven (7) interfaces, including: SCSI-2 connector, capability to store all data collected during flight from a passenger
token ring, RS-232 serial (bench test), VGA monitor, Keyboard, revenue and individual passenger's audio/entertainment listening and
Floppy Disk Drive and IDE. It stores data on an internal hard disk viewing times on a per channel bases.
drives and is controlled by a Pentium 166MHz processor with 32MB
RAM. Supports Bench Testing. The CMEU is provided with an RS-232 port
to support bench level testing. This port is be used for shop
BITE, configuration and other types of commands received from the downloading of database and/or operational code. Software is
CMT will cause the CMEU to execute or initiate the appropriate embedded in the CMEU to support unit test and code download.
functions. The CMEU also performs a self-test automatically on
power up and reports the results to the CMT.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 58
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 59
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

LOCAL AREA NETWORK HUB (LANHUB)

Primary System 2000E communication and control is provided

through a high-speed Local Area Network (LAN): The LAN use an
IEEE 802.5 Token Ring data bus operating at 16 MBS for
communications.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 60
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 61
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

TOKEN RING

The Token Ring LAN consists of LRU's serially connected by two The token, 24 bits in length, travels around the ring network when no
twisted wire pairs. Control and status information is transferred data is being transmitted. An LRU wanting to transmit data waits for
sequentially, bit by bit, from one LRU to the next. Each LRU the token to arrive. It "captures" the token, and marks it as "busy."
regenerates and repeats the received information, passing it on to The LRU now controls the LAN.
the next LRU. The last LRU in the LAN has a terminator connected
to its output port. As the last LRU sends information out, data is The controlling LRU then inserts the data (called a "frame") and the
routed back into the last LRU and transmitted through the LAN address of the receiving LRU on the LAN. The frame is variable in
completing the data flow path. length. The receiving LRU copies the data and sends an
acknowledgment to the controlling LRU. When the acknowledgment
If an LRU fails, or loses power, the Token Ring is automatically is received by the controlling LRU, the LRU releases control and
passed through the inoperative unit to continue communication with transmits a free token. This ensures that there is only one token on
other system equipment. If an LRU on the LAN is removed, the entire the network at one time, and possession of the token gives an LRU
LAN becomes inoperative. If the terminator on the last LRU on the exclusive use of the LAN.
LAN is removed, or is not properly connected, the LAN could
become inoperative.

“TOKEN” DESCRIPTION

When an LRU is physically connected to the Token Ring LAN,

access to the ring is controlled with a token-passing protocol. The
"token" is a ring access-granting message that moves from LRU to
LRU. Only one unit can have control of the token at a time; this
prevents disrupted data communications.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 62
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

EPESC

LAN INTERFACE
AND PROCESSOR

VALID

EVSCU CMT

LAN
HUB

VALID

LAN INTERFACE
AND PROCESSOR

CMEU

CORE LAN

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 63
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

VIDEO MODULATION UNIT (VMU)

The VMU receives composite baseband video signals from the MAS The VMU accepts up to twelve base band composite video signals
VCPs. The VMU amplitude modulates these video signals to RF (NTSC or PAL) from video players or any source of composite video
carrier frequencies for transmission to the Tapping Units located and amplitude modulates each signal on its own RF carrier. The
throughout the cabin. The VMU also modulates Airshow video from VMU consists of identical modules, which are under control of the
the Digital Interface Unit (DIU). microcontroller. The unit is frequency agile, and any particular video
input can be placed on any one of the 12 carriers available. Two
The VMU communicates with the EVSCU using an RS-232 VMUs may be linked through a pair of RF combiners to expand the
interface. The EVSCU sends the video carrier frequency channel system to 24 video channels. After each video input is modulated to
assignment to the VMU, and the VMU can place a video signal on the desired frequency, all of the carriers are combined and the RF
any one of twelve (12) carrier frequencies. The VMU reports channel video is split for distribution. The video carrier frequency is set via the
frequencies and fault status to EVSCU. internal microcontroller responding to external commands over the
serial RS-232 interface. The RS-232 interface allows the unit to be
The VMU translates composite baseband video signals into programmed and remotely controlled. Channel frequencies and fault
amplitude modulated carriers for transmission throughout the status is reported to the VSCU via the serial link.
aircraft. The VMU outputs are distributed to in-seat video as well as
overhead video applications.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 64
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 65
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

VMU DESCRIPTION

The VMU is used in systems which contain an overhead video

distribution network and/or an in-seat video network.

The VMU accepts up to 12 baseband video inputs and outputs RF

video to of 3 Tapping Units (TU). The TUs provide baseband
composite video for VBLIU.

Power Distribution

Upon the application of power to the unit, all channel modules are
programmed to the frequencies last commanded prior to the
removal of power.

The VMU contains a TEST VIDEO input and an internal Video Signal
Generator (VSG) (used as BITE: Built-In Test Equipment), both of
which can be used for test purposes.

The VMU maintains back-up power for a minimum of 200 ms during

system power interruption. The unit requires 115 VAC power.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 66
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 67
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

TAPPING UNITS

The TU is the overhead distribution unit for video. It demodulates the

RF carrier video to provide baseband video for the VBLIU’s. The TU
provides 3 video outputs. Each TU can tune to one of the RF video
frequencies. Each of the 3 video outputs contains the same video
signal.

The TU communicates with the EVSCU via a RS-485 data bus. Data
communications occur over the Data 1 bus.

The EVSCU tells the TU which video channel to demodulate. The

TU performs the BITE and reports the result to the EVSCU upon
request.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 68
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 69
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

VIDEO DISTRIBUTION UNIT (VDU)

Display Unit Interface

The VDU is an overhead distribution unit for video. It demodulates The VDU controls display devices through the following interfaces:
the RF carrier video to provide baseband video for display by the
monitors. The VDU provides 4 video outputs. Each VDU can 1: Power On/Off Control:
demodulate two RF video frequencies because unlike the TU which
only has one tuner, the VDU has two. The microprocessor turns the 28 VDC on or off for each display unit.

2: “On” Indicator Control:

Video Distribution
The “On” indicator signals are directly output from the
The RF Video is sent to the input card, where it is sent to a Microprocessor. These signals turn the “On” LED light on the display
directional tap. This tap splits the signal into two identical signals, unit off or on.
one which is routed to the RF Video through for output to the next
VDU in line while the other is fed to the tuner ICs. The tuner ICs pick
a channel from the video signal and output them as an IF signal.
These signals are then amplified and run through a filter, then
demodulated into a baseband video signal.

These signals are routed to the video card where an analog switch
selects either one of the outputs for the display devices in use
utilizing command signals from the microprocessor. The analog
switch output is fed to the video line driver for delivery to a display
device.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 70
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 71
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 72
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

S-VHS VTP SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION

FM Audio Distribution

The Audio Head picks up the FM audio and sends it to IC5002 for are designated as the RF Y and the RF C signals.
amplification. It produces an RF OUT signal by mixing two (2) audio
signals differing in their carrier frequencies. It sends this RF OUT The RF Y signal goes through an RF Y processor for equalization
signal through a bandpass filter to split the FM 1 and FM 2 signals. and VHS/S-VHS format detection. It is then sent to the RF Y
demodulator and processor for dropout compensation and
The demodulated signals go through several types of audio demodulation. (Dropout compensation makes up for loss of signal
processing designed for noise reduction and dynamic range due to tape defects and dirt on the tape or heads.) The signal is then
expansion. After detecting a normal/Hi-Fi signal, the Audio Head routed to Video Block Three, where it will be recombined with the RF
sends the signal to final output amplifiers in the normal audio block C signal.
as Hi-Fi CH1 and CH2.
The RF C signal from the Head Amplifier pack is routed to the
Chroma processor, where the chroma signal is extracted,
Normal Audio Distribution manipulated and restored. It is then sent through a filter for noise
reduction and also to Video Block Three.
The Audio/Control Head sends Channel 1 and Channel 2 audio to
ICs 4001 and 4002 for equalization and amplification. This is sent At Video Block Three, both RF Y and RF C signals are mixed to form
through Low Pass filters and on to a two-channel Dolby noise a composite video signal. This signal is amplified and applied to a
reduction processor. After passing through noise reduction, it sends video transformer for output to J1. Microprocessor Control
the signal on to the final amplifiers as Normal CH1 and CH2. RD-AV1113 has two (2) microprocessors, one located on the A6
card (servo/system control) and the other located on the A4 card
(front control card assembly).
Video Distribution

The Video Heads pick up the signal from the video tape being played
and send it through the Head Amplifier Pack. The output from IC5001
is two (2) signals, essentially the same, but routed differently. They

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 73
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

The microprocessor on the servo/system control card performs the

following functions:

- Cylinder motor servo control.

- Capstan motor servo control.
- Automatic tracking control.
- Mechanical mode control.
- NTSC/PAL mode selection.
- Video cassette loading and unloading control (cassette loading
motor control).
- Video head switching and head amplifier switching control.
- Audio output muting in Cue and Review Modes
- Maintenance functions.

The microprocessor for Front control performs the following

functions:

- Data communications with an external control unit.

- Reading of the control switch inputs.
- Indicator light control.
- Activation and duration control of standby mode (internal drying
operation) according to dew sensor input.
- Internal DC power on/off control according to control inputs.
- Random access functions.
- Audio and Video output muting when tape blank is played and
also during the tape header data read sequence and program
search sequence.
- Automatic cancellation of Play Mode on detection of the end of a
program.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 74
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 75
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

VIDEO/AUDIO SEAT ELECTRONIC BOX (VASEB)

The VASEB receives an RF Video/ADPCM Audio signal which

contains up to 12 modulated Video channels and 96 channels of
Audio. It demodulates the selected video frequency and
demultiplexes the associated audio channel for display and
broadcast to the passenger.

OPERATIONAL MODES

Each seat connected to a VASEB normally operates in one of two

(2) modes: Audio or Video. You request mode changes using the
Advanced Digital Passenger Control Unit (ADPCU). Pressing the
ADPCU mode button generates a mode change request.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 76
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 77
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 78
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

AUDIO MODE VIDEO MODE

The mode in which you receive audio from entertainment players, The mode in which you view movies or other video programs from
FLT Radio, etc., via the core distribution system. The VASEB allows video sources. You receive video (with audio) for a selected program
only selection of audio entertainment programs while in this mode. via the core distribution system. (The audio channel received in this
mode is integrated with the video channel.). The VASEB allows only
selection of video and the associated audio channels entertainment
Audio Mode Functions programs while in this mode.

Audio Program. In Audio Mode, select an audio program by pressing NOTE: More than one audio channel may be associated with a given
the CHANNEL UP/DOWN buttons on the ADPCU. The ADPCU video channel (for stereo sound tracks or multi-lingual movies). If no
generates channel up/down request messages. The VASEB audio is associated with a video program, the audio last presented in
receives these requests and tracks the audio channel selection. the audio mode is selected.

The VASEB maintains a Configuration Database which contains a

map of the physical and logical audio channels. Mono logical audio Video Mode Functions
channels consist of a single physical audio channel. Stereo logical
channels consist of two (2) physical channels. The VASEBs receive RF video from the VMU via the core distribution
system. The VASEB receives messages from the ADPCUs for
Channel Selection. There are 96 digital audio channels. The VASEB program selection and volume control and provides stereo or mono
determines the absolute (logical) audio channel number and selects analog audio associated with the selected video program. In this
an absolute audio channel for audio decoding. It also sends a mode, you may select only those audio channels associated with the
message to the ADPCU to identify the (logical) channel number and chosen video programs.
mono/stereo status to update the ADPCU display.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 79
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Video Tuning

The VASEB receives an RF video signal consisting of up to 24

frequency multiplexed video channels. The VASEB demodulates
selected RF video channels and passes on the resulting baseband
video signal to the Seat Display Unit. Each SDU has a separate
tuner. The VASEB can tune into any RF video channel and provide
demodulated signals to up to three seats.

Channel Selection Selecting a program in this mode is similar to the

audio mode (except that video channel selection is coordinated with
the audio channel. This coordination is accomplished using a
Configuration Database.)

Video Program.

The VASEB selects video programs while under ADPCU control.

After receiving channel up/down requests from the ADPCU, the
VASEB responds by tuning to the NEXT/PREVIOUS configured
video channel and sending back the video program number for the
ADPCU to display.

There can be up to 24 video channels. Each video channel can have

up to four (4) associated video-audio channels. A video program
consists of a physical video channel with 1 to 4 (mono) or 2 to 4 (for
1 to 2 stereo) video-audio channels.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 80
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

- +

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 81
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Overhead Video System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 82
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION EPESC DESCRIPTION ................................................................. 36

(BUSINESS CLASS) ................................................................ 2 ENHANCED VIDEO SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT (EVSCU) ............ 38
PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM ................................... 4 EVSCU DESCRIPTION ................................................................. 40
PES - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - CABIN .................................. 6 CMEU II DESCRIPTION ................................................................. 42
PES - POWER INTERFACE ......................................................... 8 VIDEO MODULATION UNIT (VMU) ................................................ 44
COMPACT DISK REPRODUCER ................................................. 10 ENHANCED AREA DISTRIBUTION BOX (EADB) ......................... 48
OPERATIONAL MODES ................................................................ 12 EADB DESCRIPTION .................................................................... 50
SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION ................................................................. 14 VIDEO/AUDIO SEAT ELECTRONICS BOX (VASEB) .................... 52
PES - VIDEO CASSETTE PLAYER Hi-8 ....................................... 16 VASEB DESCRIPTION .................................................................. 54
PES - VIDEO CASSETTE PLAYER VHS ...................................... 19 OVERRIDING MODES................................................................... 56
SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION ................................................................. 23 BITE AND SYSTEM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS ............................... 58
PES - DIGITAL PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT ............................. 26 SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION ................................................................. 60
CABIN MANAGEMENT TERMINAL (CMT) ...................................... 28 6.5” LCD DISPLAY ......................................................................... 62
CMT DESCRIPTION ...................................................................... 31 SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION ................................................................. 64
ENHANCED PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
CONTROLLER (EPESC) ......................................................... 34

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 1
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION

(BUSINESS CLASS)

The purpose of the passenger entertainment system (PES) is to

send entertainment audio and video to each passenger seat
location. Each passenger can make a selection to see/hear one of
many available video/audio channels.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 2
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 3
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

General

The main components of PES are: combined and send as ADPCM to the EPESC. Audio from the
EPESC is combined with the RF video and send to a splitter. This
- Compact Disc Reproducers (CDR's) combined ADPCM and RF video goes in two directions from the
- Personal Video Players (PVP's) splitter. It goes the a VASEB, this is intended for the purser work
- Cabin Management terminal (CMT) station (preview) and it goes to the EADB's for distribution in the
- Enhanced Passenger Entertainment Service Controller (EPESC) cabin. During a passenger address announcement, an input from
- Enhanced Video System Control Unit (EVSCU) the PAC to the EPESC replaces the entertainment/video audio, and
- One Video Audio Seat Electronic Box (VASEB)/interseat cable for passenger address audio goes to all passenger headsets.
each seat group
- One Central Memory Expansion Unit (CMEU) The DPCU in each passenger seat armrest sends volume level and
- One digital passenger control unit (DPCU) for each seat channel selection data to the VASEB. The VASEB then converts the
- Two Video Modulator Units (VMU's) selected channel to analog audio, and sends the audio to the DPCU
for the headsets. The selected video channel is converted into
baseband video for presentation on the LCD screen.
The components which interface with the PES are the:

- Digital Interface Unit (DIU) Video interface

- Passenger Address Controller (PAC)
The PVP's and the DIU sends baseband video signals to the VMU's.
The VMU's converts the baseband video signals to RF video signals.
Audio Interface The RF video signals are combined. This combined RF video
signals are combined with the ADPCM audio signals. This combined
The CDR's sends the digital audio to the EVSCU. The PVP's sends ADPCM and RF video signals are splitted in two directions, one for
analog audio to the EVSCU. The EVSCU converts the analog audio the purser workstation (preview) and one for the EADB's. The
from the PVP's to digital audio. Audio from CDR's and PVP's are EADB's distribute the combined signals for the cabin.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 4
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 5
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES - COMPONENT LOCATIONS - CABIN

The PES components and interface components in the passenger

cabin are:

- Personal Video Players

- Compact Disc Reproducers

- Cabin Management Terminal

- Enhanced Passenger Entertainment System Controller

- Video Modulator Units

- Enhanced Video System Control Unit

- Central Memory Expansion Unit

- Video Audio Seat Electronics Box/interseat cable (one for each

seat group)

- LCD screen (one for each seat)

- Digital passenger control unit (one for each seat)

- Enhanced Area Distribution Boxes

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 6
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 7
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES - POWER INTERFACE

The PWS-AC circuit breaker supplies 115v ac to all components

located at the purser workstation.

Three EADB-AC circuit breakers supplies 115v ac to the EADB's

The VIDEO CONT CTR-DC circuit breaker supplies 28v dc to the

Master Power Switch.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 8
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 9
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

COMPACT DISK REPRODUCER

The Compact Disk Reproducer (CDR) provides superb audio

quality. It does this by maintaining the digital signal from the compact
disk being played to the seat box.

The CDR handles the following functions:

Reproducing 8 monaural audio channels or four (4) stereo channels

(or any combination dictated by the software). The double-deck CDR
is designed as a compact, tray-mounted unit. It provides eight
parallel analog audio outputs and one multiplexed ADPCM digital
audio output. It can play eight (8) channels in mono or four (4) in
stereo for up to two (2) hours. The analog and digit audio outputs are
produced simultaneously. Each disk contains record mode
information, whether normal (four (4) channels) or extended (2
channels). The CDR contains two (2) identical CD decks which
endlessly play CD-I disks only. (It rejects any ordinary compact disk
as unreadable).

The CDR reproduces 8 channels of audio:

- Channels 1 through 4 on Deck 1

- Channels 5 through 8 on Deck 2

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 10
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 11
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

OPERATIONAL MODES

The CDR normally operates in one of five (5) modes: Play, Pause, Pause Mode Functions
Stop, Empty, and Test. Mode changes occur via the CMT or the
controls on the front of the CDR. The CDR enters this mode from two sources: 1) when you send a
PAUSE Command for testing or 2) when you turn the PA system key
NOTE: The CDR has no power switch and is always considered input (discrete input) to an active-low state.
“ON” when it is operational (has primary 115 V 400Hz supplied to it).
After the PAUSE command puts the CDR into the Pause Mode, the
RESUME command puts the CDR back into the Play Mode at the
PLAY MODE point where it was interrupted. Therefore, the CDR is in Pause Mode
until Play Mode is resumed. With system key input, the CDR
The CDR enters this mode when powered on. remains in Pause Mode as long as this input is kept low; it releases
the input into an inactive-open state, which puts the CDR back into
Play Mode Functions Play Mode.

In this mode, all decks (when loaded with disks) are playing, starting
from the beginning. Any deck without a disk is stopped; if all decks STOP MODE
are stopped, the CDR enters the STOP Mode.
The CDR enters this mode when all decks are stopped due to a stop
command being received from an external control unit such as the
PAUSE MODE EVSCU or EPESC.

In Pause Mode, the disks rotate (due to the CDR’s constant “ON”
state) but do not play (there is no audio reproduction).

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 12
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 13
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION

Input Distribution Power Distribution

Control of the CDR is from the CMT through the EVSCU an RS- The 115 VAC is routed to the A3 card from connector J1. The A3
232C Type Port. card, contains two (2) switching regulator that provide the +5 VDC
for the digital signal circuits and the +7.5 VDC for the CD deck
The CDR is designed to act on predetermined control commands assembly. It also contains three (3) voltage regulators that provide
sent from the ECU. It will also return responses to certain data +12 and -12 VDC for the power lines to the analog audio amplifier
request commands. Both the commands and responses are in circuits on the A2 card and +5 VDC to the analog signal circuits on
message form. One command or response consists of several the A2 card.
characters in succession, and one character consists of 10 serial
bits: one (1) start bit, seven (7) data bits, one (1) even parity bit, and
one (1) stop bit. Audio Distribution

There are two (2) data lines between the ECU and the CDR. One is The CD signal processor reads the encoded CD data at 120% of
a receive data line, which connects to the transmit data terminal of normal real-time playback speed. After EFM (encoded CD data)
the ECU; the other is a transmit data line, which connects to the signal demodulation, the CD data is routed to the CD Data
receive data terminal of the ECU. The CDR receives a command Processor. It applies control signals from the processor and sends
from the ECU via the receive data line and returns a response to the the CD data to the memory control chip. From there through an 8
ECU via the transmit data line. Meg CD data buffer that holds up to 12 seconds of reproduced, 4-
channel analog audio in case of disk read failure or skip. The buffer
There are two (2) main command types: control and data request. outputs data to the memory control chip, to be routed to the ADPCM
The CDR returns a response to the ECU when it receives a data decoder and filter and output as filtered serial data. This data is sent
request command; it returns no response to a control command to a series of D/A converters and low pass filters and output as
POWER ON, POWER OFF, START, STOP, PAUSE, UNPAUSE, analog audio outputs.
BOARDING MUSIC CONTROL, BITE START and STATUS
REQUEST, CDR STATUS REQUEST, ELAPSED TIME REQUEST,
etc.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 14
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 15
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES - VIDEO CASSETTE PLAYER Hi-8

Power Switch:

This Hi 8 VCP plays, 8 mm pre-recorded video cassettes. It plays in Press this push-button switch to make the VCP operational. The
the NTSC. Tapes are loaded horizontally, label side up, into the Power button illuminates.
cassette opening in the front of the VCP. If a video cassette is
already loaded, the spring-loaded door prevents loading a second NOTE: This switch does not actually apply power to the VCP. Part of
cassette. the VCP circuitry is always energized as long as 115 VAC, 400 Hz is
supplied to the VCP.

VCP functions include: The VCP does not accept a video cassette unless the Power Switch
is lighted. It cannot fully load the VCP cassette with power off. If you
- Playing video tapes try to load a cassette with power off, the VCP automatically rejects it.
- Stopping video tapes If main power to the system is removed after a cassette is loaded,
- Ejecting video tapes the cassette remains locked inside the VCP until power is restored.
- Monitoring faults in video tape operations.

Hi-8 VCP

Control of the VCP is from the Cabin Management Terminal (CMT)

or by using the six momentary push switches located on the front
panel. Whether you use CMT or manual control, the front panel
switches indicate the VCP current operating mode/condition.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 16
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 17
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 18
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES - VIDEO CASSETTE PLAYER VHS

Purpose Mode Controls

The video tape player (PVP 12) provides recorded video and audio EJECT - Pressing this switch ejects the tape. EJECT works even if
signals. the VTP is off. If pressed while off, the VTP turns on, ejects the tape,
and then turns off.

General
Digital Display and Mode Lights
The VTP plays video cassettes in VHS or S-VHS format. They may
be recorded using NTSC or PAL standard. The VTP provides one A five digit display is used as an indicator for several operations. The
video and four audio outputs. This allows for stereo, bilingual audio. display is divided into two groups (3-digit and 2-digit). The display
provides the following indications:
The audio outputs are channels:
- Blank when loaded with an ordinary tape.
- 1; hi-fi (FM) audio channel 1
- 2; hi-fi (FM) audio channel 2 - 000-00 when a newly loaded tape is identified as a multi-program
- 3; normal audio channel 1 tape.
- 4; normal audio channel 2
- Group, program order, and segment number in PROGRAM
The VTP has a random access function when used with specially mode. The first digit is the group (hexidecimal). The second and
encoded tapes. Random access may be controlled by the Cabin third digits are the program order (1-24). The fourth and fifth digits
Management Terminal (CMT) or by front panel controls. If the are the segment (1-24).
random access function is initiated by the front panel controls,
remote control operation is not possible. - Group, next segment, and current segment in RA (random
access) PLAYING mode. The first digit is the group. The second
and third digits are the next segment. The fourth and fifth digits
are the current segment.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 19
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

- Remaining time in SHOW TIME mode. Time appears in the first

three digits.

PROGRAM, RA PLAYING, and REMAINING TIME lights - indicate the

current mode of the random access function.

Status Lights

POWER light - on when power is applied to the VTP.

TAPE IN light - on when a tape is in the VTR. May be on whether the

VTR is on or off.

STANDBY light - on when drying operation is on. VTR can not be

used until light turns off. Drying process takes a minimum of 30
minutes.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 20
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 21
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 22
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION

FM Audio Distribution Video Distribution

The Audio Head picks up the FM audio and sends it to IC5002 for The Video Heads pick up the signal from the video tape being played
amplification. It produces an RF OUT signal by mixing two (2) audio and send it through the Head Amplifier Pack. The output from IC5001
signals differing in their carrier frequencies. It sends this RF OUT is two (2) signals, essentially the same, but routed differently. They
signal through a bandpass filter to split the FM 1 and FM 2 signals. are designated as the RF Y and the RF C signals.

The demodulated signals go through several types of audio The RF Y signal goes through an RF Y processor for equalization
processing designed for noise reduction and dynamic range and VHS/S-VHS format detection. It is then sent to the RF Y
expansion. After detecting a normal/Hi-Fi signal, the Audio Head demodulator and processor for dropout compensation and
sends the signal to final output amplifiers in the normal audio block demodulation. (Dropout compensation makes up for loss of signal
as Hi-Fi CH1 and CH2. due to tape defects and dirt on the tape or heads.) The signal is then
routed to Video Block Three, where it will be recombined with the RF
C signal.
Normal Audio Distribution
The RF C signal from the Head Amplifier pack is routed to the
The Audio/Control Head sends Channel 1 and Channel 2 audio to Chroma processor, where the chroma signal is extracted,
ICs 4001 and 4002 for equalization and amplification. This is sent manipulated and restored. It is then sent through a filter for noise
through Low Pass filters and on to a two-channel Dolby noise reduction and also to Video Block Three.
reduction processor. After passing through noise reduction, it sends
the signal on to the final amplifiers as Normal CH1 and CH2. At Video Block Three, both RF Y and RF C signals are mixed to form
a composite video signal. This signal is amplified and applied to a
video transformer for output to J1.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 23
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Microprocessor Control

The microprocessor on the servo/system control card performs the The microprocessor for Front control performs the following
following functions: functions:

- Cylinder motor servo control. - Data communications with an external control unit.
- Capstan motor servo control. - Reading of the control switch inputs.
- Automatic tracking control. - Indicator light control.
- Mechanical mode control. - Activation and duration control of standby mode (internal drying
- NTSC/PAL mode selection. operation) according to dew sensor input.
- Video cassette loading and unloading control (cassette loading - Internal DC power on/off control according to control inputs.
motor control). - Random access functions.
- Video head switching and head amplifier switching control. - Audio and Video output muting when tape blank is played and
- Audio output muting in Cue and Review Modes also during the tape header data read sequence and program
- Maintenance functions. search sequence.
- Automatic cancellation of Play Mode on detection of the end of a
program.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 24
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 25
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PES - DIGITAL PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT

Purpose

The digital passenger control unit (DPCU) provides the passengers

with controls that let a passenger choose an audio or video program
and adjust its volume level. This selection is done with the mode
switch.

Operation

Two momentary-action channel select switches allow selection of

audio/video programs. The selected channel number shows on two
LED’s. Two momentary-action volume control switches let the
passenger adjust the audio volume level.

Operation of the other switches on the DPCU are for use with the
passenger service system.

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING ELECTROSTATIC
DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES (REF 20-41-02/201).
CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN BE DAMAGED BY STATIC
DISCHARGE.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 26
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 27
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CABIN MANAGEMENT TERMINAL (CMT)

The CMT is the System interface for the Flight Attendants and
Maintenance personnel. The CMT is a graphic interface that allows
the Cabin crew or Maintenance personnel to perform a wide variety
of operations, including:

- Controlling video distribution to Cabin Zones

- Cabin Configuration Management
- Controlling peripherals, including:
- Previewing video and audio programs
- Monitoring ON/OFF control
- Monitoring lockout (program disable)
- Airshow operation and control data entry
- VCP control
- Initiating BITE requests to all peripherals
- Storing BITE data for fault location and unit type
- Software Loading and Configuration Reporting
- Engineering Tests

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 28
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 29
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 30
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CMT DESCRIPTION

The CMT has a modular design with a core processing unit When the system is powered ON, the CMT initializes and an MAS
consisting of a 33MHz 80486SX processor with eight (8) Megs of Logo is displayed with a countdown to initialization while it loads the
RAM expandable to 64 Megs, four (4) serial ports, a Centronics port, operational program. After initialization, the system shows the
a floppy disk interface, keyboard controller, and 80 MB Flash Drive appropriate airline Logo on the screen. A password is needed to
(used with the CMT mass storage device. This additional storage is access the Maintenance screens.
useful for adding CMT application software and storing BITE failures
and statistical data). The CMT features a 10" color LCD display with
high-speed graphical user interaction capability via either twenty-four CMT Controls and Features
(24) Line Select Keys (LSK) (eight (8) on each vertical side and eight
(8) horizontal) and touch screen. Ventilation Slots - The ventilation slots in the CMT allow air to flow
and minimize the operating temperature. Keep these slots clear of
The CMT communicates with other main controllers (such as obstructions and insert no objects into the ventilation slots or fans
EVSCU, EPESC, CMEU) via a 16 MHz Token Ring LAN. External that provide ventilation to the CMT.
CMT interfaces include an RS-232 port, audio jack, and keyboard
connector. A dual-pin audio jack is built into the CMT for audio Line Select Keys - There are sixteen (16) Line Select Keys (LSK),
preview. with eight (8) on each side of the CMT screen. (Refer to the LSKs to
as R1 through R8 or L1 through L8, the right and left sides,
The CMT stores data and executes application programs from the respectively. For example: L1 is the top left LSK and R1 is the top
CMEU. The CMT performs a series of self-tests at power up. right LSK.)

The CMT core processing unit uses a modified MS-DOS 5.0 and a Function Call-Out - Throughout the CMT menus, Function Call-Outs
modified Windows 3.1 customized for System applications. The (FCO) appear adjacent to the LSKs. Activation of the FCO is done
CMT keyboard and disk drive unit is installed for use with future by selecting the LSK adjacent to it. When the FCO is displayed with
configurations. The CMT database can store up to twelve (12) an arrow, you can select the next adjacent LSK to go to another CMT
different A/C configurations for audio/video and PA Zoning. Screen. When an asterisk is displayed, you can select the adjacent
LSK to execute the FCO. Green FCO text indicates an active state;

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 31
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

black text indicates an inactive state.

Function Select Keys - There are eight (8) Function Select Keys
(FSK), arranged horizontally at the bottom of the CMT Screen.
(Refer to the FSKs as F1 through F8, with the left-most FSK being
F1.)

Headphone Jacks - These receive a two-prong head-phone plug for

monitoring audio programs from the CMT.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 32
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 33
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ENHANCED PASSENGER ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM

CONTROLLER (EPESC)

The EPESC is the main system controller for the Passenger

Entertainment System (PES).

The EPESC communicates with the seat network over the Token
Ring via the Enhanced Area Distribution Boxes (EADB) and provides
the means for controlling and configuring the PES. The EPESC also
communicates with the System Controllers (CMT, EVSCU, CMEU)
through a Token Ring LAN. The LAN is used for configuration and
code download as well as for control and BITE communications.

The EPESC can support up to three (3) PA inputs.

The EPESC communicates with the following systems and LRUs:

- VCC System controller LRUs (CMT, CMEU, EVSCU) over Token

Ring LAN.
- Seat LAN via Token Ring LAN network through EADBs.
- AIRSHOW over RS 485 bus.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 34
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 35
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

EPESC DESCRIPTION

The EPESC is the main system controller for the Passenger on and upon request by the CMT. The EPESC maintains back-up
Entertainment System. The EPESC is also the gateway between the power for a minimum of 200 ms during system power interruptions.
seat distribution network and external Aircraft systems and
components.
EPESC Functions
Enhancements to the EPESC include the extension of the token ring
to the EADB for high-speed, bi-directional data transfer. Audio Distribution

The EPESC digitizes and compresses analog audio inputs from the The EPESC receives analog audio from the PA Controller. The audio
Passenger Address Controller. This interface can support up to three is digitized and combined with the ADPCM audio signal (received
(3) passenger address. from the EVSCU) and sent to the EADBs for distribution to the seats.

The EPESC accepts digitized audio via a serial bit stream. The unit The EPESC communicates with the following systems and LRUs:
is capable of receiving 72 channels of digitized audio via a coaxial
cable input from the EVSCU. If this input is detected, the EPESC - VCC System controller LRUs (CMT, CMEU, EVSCU) over Token
automatically synchronizes its clock to the clock recovered from this Ring LAN.
signal and processes the information in a synchronous manner.
- Seat LAN via Token Ring LAN network through the EADBs.
Communication from the EPESC to the seat network is provided by
the Token Ring LAN, which connects all the major controllers in
system. The EPESC communicates to the EADBs via a single, BITE
twisted-pair EPESC-EADB Data 1 Bus.
BITE data is provided to the EPESC from the CMEU via the Token
Configuration, BITE, and other types of commands received from Ring LAN.
other systems are received by the EPESC to execute or initiate the
appropriate functions. BITE is performed automatically upon power

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 36
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 37
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ENHANCED VIDEO SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT (EVSCU)

The EVSCU receives audio from the CDRs and video-audio from the
VCPs. This audio will be output as a multiplexed signal to the
EPESC for distribution to the seat network.

The EVSCU can output three (3) channels of PA video-audio and

three (3) Video PA keylines when Video PA is selected at the CMT.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 38
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 39
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

EVSCU DESCRIPTION Communications

The EVSCU provides the central control for the video subsystem The EVSCU communicates to other system control units over the
portions of system. The EVSCU collects all video and compact disk Token Ring Local Area Network.
(CD) audio programs and distributes them to the seat distribution
network via the EPESC. Control of the Video Cassette Players
(VCP), CD Reproducers (CDRs), Video Modulator Unit (VMU), Video The EVSCU communicates with the following LRUs:
Distribution Units (VDUs) and Tapping Units (TUs) is also provided
by the EVSCU. - VCPs: The EVSCU communicates with the VCPs on an RS-232
bus. Each VCP will have its’ own dedicated RS-232 port. The
The Cabin Management Terminal (CMT) is the user interface which EVSCU receives function control commands from the CMT (user
controls the EVSCU. Preview video and audio is received at the CMT input).
via a seat box (VASEB). The CMT requests BITE information from
the EVSCU on all units the EVSCU controls (i.e., VDUs, TUs, VMUs, - CDRs: The EVSCU communicates with the CDRs on an RS-232
VCPs CDRs, etc.). BITE is performed automatically on power up or bus. Each CDR will have its’ own dedicated RS-232 port.
upon request from the CMT or CMEU.
- CMT: The EVSCU and CMT communicate via a Token Ring LAN.
The CMT sends formatted user commands to the EVSCU for
Signal Distribution processing and execution.

Audio Distribution - Video Modulation Unit (VMU): The EVSCU communicates with
the VMU to assign video channel frequencies and monitor status
The EVSCU is capable of accepting up to forty-eight (48) analog and perform BITE functions.
audio channels from VCPs and up to forty-eight (48) digital channels
from CDRs, to a maximum of seventy-two (72) channels total. The - Commands and BITE information are sent over an RS-232 data
analog audio signals are digitized in the EVSCU and are bus between the EVSCU and the VMU.
compressed from sixteen (16) bits to four (4) data bits using the
proprietary technique for data compression.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 40
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 41
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

CMEU II DESCRIPTION CMEU II FUNCTIONS

The CMEU is a core component of the system designed to provide The CMEU supports a variety of functions, including database and
memory storage for software applications and cabin management application software download to the seat network and data storage
data. The CMEU also stores the database and BITE functions for and retrieval. The CMEU provides the following functions:
itself and other system LRUs.
Supports In-Flight Statistics Data Collection. The CMEU has the
The CMEU II has seven (7) interfaces, including: SCSI-2 connector, capability to store all data collected during flight from a passenger
token ring, RS-232 serial (bench test), VGA monitor, Keyboard, revenue and individual passenger's audio/entertainment listening and
Floppy Disk Drive and IDE. It stores data on an internal hard disk viewing times on a per channel bases.
drives and is controlled by a Pentium 166MHz processor with 32MB
RAM. Supports Bench Testing. The CMEU is provided with an RS-232 port
to support bench level testing. This port is be used for shop
BITE, configuration and other types of commands received from the downloading of database and/or operational code. Software is
CMT will cause the CMEU to execute or initiate the appropriate embedded in the CMEU to support unit test and code download.
functions. The CMEU also performs a self-test automatically on
power up and reports the results to the CMT.

The CMEU II maintains backup power for a minimum of 11 seconds

during system power interruptions so as to eliminate unnecessary
reset of system parameters.

The CMEU II contains a 175 MB flash drive to store the Operating

System software and two (2) mirrored 2.1 GB hard disk drives to
store a large amount of information (data and programs). The drive
array uses the mirrored drives to achieve greater reliability.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 42
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 43
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

VIDEO MODULATION UNIT (VMU)

The VMU receives composite baseband video signals from the

VCPs. The VMU amplitude modulates these video signals to RF
carrier frequencies for transmission to the EADBs and to the
Tapping Units located throughout the cabin. The VMU receives also
Airshow video from the Digital Interface Unit (DIU).

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 44
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 45
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

VMU

The VMU communicates with the EVSCU using an RS-232 After each video input is modulated to the desired frequency, all of
interface. The EVSCU sends the video carrier frequency channel the carriers are combined and the composite is split for distribution.
assignment to the VMU, and the VMU can place a video signal on
any one of twelve (12) carrier frequencies. The VMU reports channel
frequencies and fault status to EVSCU. Microprocessor Control and Communication

The VMU translates composite baseband video signals into The video carrier frequency is set via the internal microcontroller
amplitude modulated carriers for transmission throughout the responding to the external commands from the EVSCU. The VMU
aircraft. The VMU outputs are distributed to in-seat video as well as and EVSCU are linked by an RS-232C serial interface. The RS-232
overhead video applications. interface allows the unit to be programmed and remotely controlled.
Channel frequencies and the fault status are reported to the EVSCU.
The VMU consists of identical modules, which are under control of
the microcontroller. The unit is frequency agile, and any particular
video input can be placed on any one of the 12 carriers available. Power Distribution
Two VMUs are linked through a RF combiners to expand the system
to 24 video channels. After each video input is modulated to the Upon the application of power to the unit, all channel modules are
desired frequency, all of the carriers are combined and the RF video programmed to the frequencies last commanded prior to the
is split for distribution. The video carrier frequency is set via the removal of power.
internal microcontroller responding to external commands over the
serial RS-232 interface. The RS-232 interface allows the unit to be The VMU contains a TEST VIDEO input and an internal Video Signal
programmed and remotely controlled. Channel frequencies and fault Generator (VSG) (used as BITE: Built-In Test Equipment), both of
status is reported to the VSCU via the serial link. which can be used for test purposes.

The video carrier frequencies range from 139.25 to 295.25 MHz with The VMU maintains back-up power for a minimum of 200 ms during
one VMU. Each frequency is separated by 14 Mhz. If two VMUs are system power interruption. The unit requires 115 VAC power and is
utilized in a configuration, the frequencies are separated by 7 Mhz. housed in an ARINC 4 MCU enclosure with a size 1 connector.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 46
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 47
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ENHANCED AREA DISTRIBUTION BOX (EADB)

The EADB is a zone controller that distributes power, Token Ring,

RS-485, RF Video and ADPCM Audio to the seat network.

The EADBs are connected in series; each EADB supplies outputs

for a maximum of four (4) seat columns of VASEBs using RS-485
protocol. Each EADB also has one (1) output for a Crew Rest
Compartment (CRC) column.

The EADB communicates with other system controllers (CMT,

EVSCU, EPESC, CMEU) on the Cabin Token Ring LAN through the
EPESC.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 48
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 49
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

EADB DESCRIPTION

The EADB acts as a zone controller and distributes power, audio/ NOTE: Unused RF output ports of the EADB must be terminated
video signals to/from the seat network in a LAN operation. Up to eight using the terminator.
EADBs can be connected in series by a coaxial cable and two
twisted pair data busses (TX/RX). The EADB requires a hard-wired The CPU in the EADB is a MC68340 16-bit series processor with 1
address on J1 via three address lines. The coaxial cable is a MB of RAM and 1MB flash memory.
downlink only and consists of the RF modulated video, multiplexed
ADPCM entertainment audio and PA audio. This information is
transmitted by the EPESC. Power Distribution:

The EPESC-EADB Data Bus is an extension of the token ring Circuit breakers are located on cards A1, A7, and A8. The internal
network operating at 16 MB/sec. This `headend' bus is used for power supply distribution block is located on the A6 card.
communication between the EPESC and EADB. The zone seat
network configuration is downloaded from the EPESC to EADB via
this data bus.

The EADB is designed to feed four columns of seat boxes and one
(a fifth) auxiliary output. The fifth output has a much lower signal level
and is typically designed to feed the crew rest compartment (CRC).

Power distribution to the seats is provided by the EADB and each

output is limited to 7A @ 115VAC, 400Hz. An automatic reset circuit
breaker and ground fault detection circuit is installed in each power
feed. It is not mandatory for seat power to be fed through the EADB.
If the seat power bypasses the EADB up to 20 rows per column can
be fed per output.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 50
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 51
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

VIDEO/AUDIO SEAT ELECTRONICS BOX (VASEB)

The Video/Audio Seat Electronics Box (VASEB) provides video,

audio, and passenger service functions to passengers and flight
crew (in the Crew Rest Compartments) with System access. It is
also positioned in the VCC for Video/Audio preview at the CMT.

The VASEB handles the following functions:

- Demodulating Video Signals

- Demultiplexing Audio for the Headset
- LCD display interface
- Digital-integrated passenger control unit interface

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 52
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 53
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

VASEB DESCRIPTION

The VASEB receives an RF Video/ADPCM Audio signal which Channel Selection. There are 96 digital audio channels. The VASEB
contains up to 24 modulated Video channels and 96 channels of determines the absolute (logical) audio channel number and selects
Audio. It demodulates the selected video frequency and an absolute audio channel for audio decoding. It also sends a
demultiplexes the associated audio channel for display and message to the DPCU to identify the (logical) channel number and
broadcast to the passenger. mono/stereo status to update the DPCU display.

OPERATIONAL MODES VIDEO MODE

Each seat connected to a VASEB normally operates in one of two The mode in which you view movies or other video programs from
(2) modes: Audio or Video. Pressing the DPCU mode button video sources. You receive video (with audio) for a selected program
generates a mode change request .AUDIO MODE, VIDEO MODE. via the core distribution system. (The audio channel received in this
mode is integrated with the video channel.). The VASEB allows only
selection of video and the associated audio channels entertainment
Audio Mode Functions programs while in this mode.

Audio Program. In Audio Mode, select an audio program by pressing NOTE: More than one audio channel may be associated with a given
the CHANNEL UP/DOWN buttons on the ADPCU. The DPCU video channel (for stereo sound tracks or multi-lingual movies). If no
generates channel up/down request messages. The VASEB audio is associated with a video program, the audio last presented in
receives these requests and tracks the audio channel selection. the audio mode is selected (Flight Tracking).

The VASEB maintains a Configuration Database which contains a

map of the physical and logical audio channels. Mono logical audio Video Mode Functions
channels consist of a single physical audio channel. Stereo logical
channels consist of two (2) physical channels. The VASEBs receive RF video from the VMU via the core distribution
system. The VASEB receives messages from the DPCUs for

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 54
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

program selection and volume control and provides stereo or mono

analog audio associated with the selected video program. In this
mode, you may select only those audio channels associated with the
chosen video programs.

Video Tuning The VASEB receives an RF video signal consisting of

up to 24 frequency multiplexed video channels. The VASEB
demodulates selected RF video channels and passes on the
resulting baseband video signal to the Seat Display Unit. Each SDU
has a separate tuner. The VASEB can tune into any RF video
channel and provide demodulated signals to up to three seats.

Channel Selection Selecting a program in this mode is similar to the

audio mode (except that video channel selection is coordinated with
the audio channel. This coordination is accomplished using a
Configuration Database.)

There can be up to 24 video channels. Each video channel can have

up to four (4) associated video-audio channels. A video program
consists of a physical video channel with 1 to 4 (mono) or 2 to 4 (for
1 to 2 stereo) video-audio channels.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 55
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

OVERRIDING MODES

Video PA Mode broadcasts PA video to all displays. It overrides any NOTE: The VASEB generally grants mode requests but may deny
programs currently selected at all seats in the target zone(s). In mode change requests in special circumstances (i.e., attendant-
video PA mode, audio volume defaults to a preset level and the video initiated modes as PA or Video PA Override modes or a
tuner will default to the designated Video PA channel for the duration. Decompression state). Each seat may be programmed to inhibit
All VCP operations will pause. Displays will automatically turn on at access to video functions.
seats not in a video mode and not in a stowed position. When video
PA mode is exited, each seat reverts to its prior mode.

PA Mode broadcasts PA announcements to the seats in the receiving

zone(s). On system command, it controls the Passenger Address
(PA) override function by switching its audio and video outputs to a
pre-programmed PA audio channel. In PA mode, current seat
operations pause. The announcement audio overrides whichever
audio was active at the seats. Audio volume defaults to a preset level
for the duration of the announcement. After the announcement, the
system restores the seat to its previous audio and operational mode.

Decompression A decompression message sent over the RS-485

data bus will causes power to all video display devices to be turned
OFF.

Mode Selection allows you to switch between modes. All seats

default to a mode and audio level specified by the Configuration
Database at Power-Up. (You can also configure the Power Up
Mode.) Thereafter, the VASEB controls the mode and maintains
audio volume across mode changes.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 56
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 57
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

BITE AND SYSTEM SUPPORT FUNCTIONS

The VASEB is capable of performing support functions which include

system control, communication with the core system, and BITE and
code download.

BITE: When it receives BITE commands from the EADB, the VASEB
performs an automatic self-test However, once initiated, BITE
activation interrupts normal VASEB operation. BITE checks the
following:

- RS-485 operation
- Processors
- Memories
- Audio and Video
- DPCU and LCD communication interfaces
- Power Supply

BITE results are transmitted to the EADB via the RS-485 interface.
Upon completion of BITE testing, the VASEB re-initializes in a
complete power-up and then returns to normal operation.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 58
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 59
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION

Input Distribution Video Distribution

The Input board receives the RF/PCM signal from the J1 connector The VASEB first amplifies, then splits the RF signal and routes the
and runs it through a directional tap. The output is routed from the split signal to the two (2) seat tuners. The tuners demodulate the
tap to J2 for the next VASEB in line and to a High and Low Pass filter. video signal according to the data sent from the Microprocessor
The Input board routes the RF video signal to the Tuner card through card. The VASEB amplifies this signal, extracts, demodulates, and
a coaxial cable. PCM audio is applied to the Audio card. converts the IF video signal to a composite video signal. The
demodulator also feeds AGC and AFC signals back to the TV tuner
modules.
Power Distribution
Microprocessor Control
The VASEB receives 115 VAC, 400 Hz. This is routed to the Power
Supply Module. The Power Supply Module supplies a +5, +5 backup, The main processor for the VASEB is the 16-bit processor operating
+18, +9, +15, and a -12 VDC to be used in the VASEB. It distributes on a 14.7456 Mhz clock with 1 Meg of flash type EEPROM for the
these DC voltages to their respective cards in the system. operating program and fixed data storage. It also uses 512 K of
static RAM and 1 Meg of Serial EEPROM for backup information
storage.
Audio Distribution

The PCM signal is applied to a high-speed comparator, which

reshapes the PCM waveform and runs it through a clock/data
recovery chip to recover the data and the 38.707 MHz clock. It then
runs the waveform through an IVAS gate array to extract the channel
data for de-compression. It routes this output to a MASH D/A
converter, where the signal is converted to Stereo analog signals.

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 60
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 61
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

6.5” LCD DISPLAY

The LCD communicates with the VASEB. The LCD receives LCD monitor is 220 (V) by 882 (H) pixels.
character data and BITE commands from the VASEB, then returns
the BITE result to the VASEB. The LCD is capable of receiving PAL and NTSC standard composite
video signals. The only external control on the monitor is the
The LCD has character generation capability. The LCD displays brightness function. This controls the bias on the LCD panel.
characters when the passenger pushes the brightness control, or
adjusts channel/volume settings. The in-seat LCD monitor may be turned off by any of three different
conditions:
LCD power is supplied by the VASEB when the passenger selects
the “video” mode on the handset. The LCD turns off automatically LCD place in stowed position will automatically remove power from
when the monitor is stowed back in the armrest. A magnet installed the unit.
inside the armrest activates the LCD's built-in switch to shut off the
power. The LCD also has a video detector that turns off the back- Passenger selecting a non-video program via the DPCU removes
light when no video is detected. power from the LCD.

The LCD is masked internally to increase brightness and to prevent

viewing from adjacent seats, thus making the passenger viewing
angle critical to picture quality. The physical position of each LCD
can be adjusted to achieve optimum picture quality.

LCD Description

The LCD monitors employ the latest Thin Film Transistor Active
Matrix technology available today. The LCD back lighting is provided
by cold cathode long life fluorescent tubes. The resolution of this

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 62
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 63
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION

Power Distribution

The Power Control Card Assembly controls the +18 VDC power the Main Circuit card. There is no signal manipulation that takes
from J1 or J2 and provides a through path for the incoming video place on the A2 card; however, it uses the signal to trigger the
signal to the A1 card. automatic on/off control for the LCD Backlight.

The Power Control Card supplies five different voltages to the Main The Composite Color video signal from J1 is sent through a
Circuit Card Assembly. A +5 VB is supplied to the microprocessor horizontal sync detector and the a Y/C separator circuit. This circuit
and associated circuits, +12 VB is supplied to the Video amplifier (NTSC or PAL) is selected via the NTSC or PAL selector circuit. The
stage and Video signal detector circuit to generate the video wake-up signal undergoes color decoding and then through a sync separator.
signal. A +5 V is supplied to the timing signal generation and This removes the timing signal to reference the horizontal and
switching control digital circuits. Another +12 V supplies the analog vertical sync and display timing signals. The signal is then passed to
video circuits other than the video pre-amp stage and the video the LCD Module assembly for translation and display.
signal detector. The fifth is a +15 V that is used in the LCD drive
circuitry.
Microprocessor Control
Two other voltages used on the Main circuit card are created locally.
The -5 V is generated by running the +5 V through a switching The microprocessor has the ability to adjust brightness, contrast,
regulator and the +20 V is the +5 and +15 V run through a summing color, and tint, display channel, volume, etc. on the LCD, perform
circuit. data communication with the SVU, check the LCD Backlight, and
control the power supply.

Video Distribution NOTE: When the LCD is communicating with the LCD, all other
functions are suspended.
The video input is received by J1 or J2 and sent to the Power Control
card. This card only provides a through path for the video signal to

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 64
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 65
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Entertainment System (Business Class)
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-32

Isue: Page 66
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION .................. 2 PSS - OUTBOARD OVERHEAD ELECTRONICS UNIT................ 46
PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM ................................................ 4 PSS - OUTBOARD OVERHEAD ELECTRONICS
DPCU Control ................................................................................ 5 UNIT-INSTALLATION .............................................................. 48
PSS-COMPONENT LOCATIONS - MAIN EQUIPMENT PSS - PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT ............................................ 50
CENTER ..................................................................................... 8 PSS - LIGHT/CHIME CONTROL MODULE ................................... 52
PSS-COMPONENT LOCATIONS - CABIN .................................... 10 PSS - PASSENGER INFORMATION SIGNS ................................ 54
PSS - POWER INTERFACE - 1 ..................................................... 16 PSS - LAVATORY .......................................................................... 56
PSS - POWER INTERFACE - 2 ..................................................... 18 PSS - CABIN SYSTEM MODULE .................................................. 58
PSS - POWER INTERFACE - 3 ..................................................... 20 PSS - CABIN CONFIGURATION TEST MODULE ........................ 62
PSS - POWER INTERFACE - 4 ..................................................... 22 PSS - CENTRAL MANAGEMENT UNIT ........................................ 64
PSS-ATTENDANT CALL/READING LIGHTS ................................ 24 PSS - ENTERTAINMENT/SERVICE CONTROLLER
PSS-LAVATORY/PASSENGER INFORMATION SIGNS .............. 27 DISCRETES ............................................................................... 71
PSS-CCTM CONTROLS ............................................................... 30 PSS - ESC OPERATION ............................................................... 74
PSS - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER PASSENGER ZONE PSS - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER OPERATION ....................... 76
INTERFACES............................................................................. 32 PSS - CABIN SYSTEM MODULE OPERATION ............................ 80
PSS - DIGITAL PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT ............................ 34 PSS - SEU/DPCU OPERATION .................................................... 82
PSS - SEAT ELECTRONICS UNIT ................................................ 36 PSS - READING LIGHT/ROW CALL LIGHT OPERATION............ 84
PSS - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER ............................................. 38 PSS - LAVATORY OPERATION.................................................... 86
PSS - MASTER CALL LIGHTS ...................................................... 40 PSS - PASSENGER INFORMATION SIGN OPERATION ............. 88
PSS - ENTERTAINMENT/SERVICE CONTROLLER .................... 42 PSS - CHIME MUTE OPERATION ................................................ 90
PSS - INBOARD OVERHEAD ELECTRONICS UNIT.................... 44 PSS - PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES .......................................... 92

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 1
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM - INTRODUCTION

The passenger service system (PSS) gives the passengers control

of:

- Passenger reading lights

- Passenger to attendant calls
- Lavatory to attendant calls

The system also controls passenger information signs.

23.33.0701 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 2
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0201 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 3
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PASSENGER SERVICE SYSTEM

- Three EFIS/EICAS interface units (EIUs)

General - Air/ground relay

The main components of the PSS are: - Passenger address controller (PAC)

- Entertainment/service controller (ESC) - Passenger information signs

- Four local area controllers (LACs) - Lavatories (Lavs)

- One seat electronics unit (SEU)/interseat cable for each seat - Passenger service units (PSUs)
group
- Master call lights
- One SEU termination plug for each column

23.33.0702A-002
- One inboard or outboard overhead electronics unit (OEU) for
each passenger service unit (approximate)

- One digital passenger control unit (DPCU) for each seat

- Cabin configuration test module (CCTM)

- Three cabin system modules (CSMs)

- Central management unit (CMU)The components that interface

with the PSS are:

- Software data loader

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 4
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

DPCU Control Lavatory Functions

Passengers use a digital passenger control unit (DPCU) to control: Lavatories have an interface with inboard overhead electronics units
(I-OEUs). The I-OEUs give control of:
- Passenger reading lights
- Passenger to attendant calls - Lavatory to attendant calls
- Lavatory occupied signs
- The return to seat sign in the lavatory
Reading Light Control

Reading light selections go through the seat electronics units (SEUs) Passenger Information Sign Control
to a local area controller (LAC). The LAC sends the selection to an
overhead electronics unit which makes the reading light come on or The ESC uses these discrete inputs to control the passenger
go off. information signs:

- No smoking
Passenger To Attendant Call Control - Fasten seatbelts
- Decompression
23.33.0702B-002
Attendant call selections go through the SEUs to a LAC. The LAC:

- Sends the selection to an overhead electronics unit which makes

a row call light above the passengers seat come on.

- Makes a master call light at the attendants station come on.

- Sends the selection through the entertainment/service controller

(ESC) to the passenger address controller (PAC). The PAC
makes a chime sound at the attendants station.

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 5
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Passenger Information Sign Control (cont) Cabin Configuration Test Module

When the ESC gets a discrete input, it sends a control signal to the Switches on the CCTM's front panel:
LACs, which send it to the OEUs. The OEUs make the passenger
information signs come on or go off. - Adjust smoking sections (Not used by KLM)
- Select the ESCs normal or alternate controller circuit
- Select alternate CSM operation (Not used by KLM)
Chime Off Control
23.33.0702C-002

Each attendants station has a chime off switch. The chime off switch
stops passenger to attendant call chimes at the attendants station. It
does not effect lavatory to attendant or attendant to attendant call
chimes.

Cabin System Module

Switches on the CSM's front panel control:

- Power to the SEUs and OEUs

- Passenger reading lights
- Passenger to attendant call reset

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 6
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0202 -002

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 7
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS-COMPONENT LOCATIONS - MAIN EQUIPMENT CENTER

The PSS components and interface components in the main - RDNG LTS ZONE C/D RIGHT circuit breaker
equipment center are:
- RDNG LTS ZONE C/D CTR circuit breaker
- Entertainment/service controller (ESC)
- RDNG LTS ZONE C/D LEFT circuit breaker
- Central management unit (CMU)
- RDNG LTS ZONE E RIGHT circuit breaker
- AUDIO ENT-TAPE/MUX circuit breaker
- RDNG LTS ZONE E CTR circuit breaker
- ENT/SERV-DC circuit breaker
- RDNG LTS ZONE E LEFT circuit breaker
- ENT/SERV-AC circuit breaker
- RDNG LTS UPR DK circuit breaker
- SEAT ELEX ZONE A/B circuit breaker
- Seat electronics unit relay, R7574
- SEAT ELEX ZONE C/D circuit breaker
- Reading light relay-1, R7575
- SEAT ELEX ZONE E circuit breaker
- Reading light relay-2, R7576
- SEAT ELEX UPR DK circuit breaker
- Reading light relay-3, R7577
- RDNG LTS ZONE A/B RIGHT circuit breaker
- Audio entertainment relay, R7578
- RDNG LTS ZONE A/B CTR circuit breaker
23.33.0703A-001

- RDNG LTS ZONE A/B LEFT circuit breaker

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 8
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0203 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 9
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS-COMPONENT LOCATIONS - CABIN

The PSS components and interface components in the passenger

cabin are:

- Local area controller-1

- Local area controller-2

- Local area controller-3

- Local area controller-4

- Seat electronics unit/interseat cable (one for each seat group)

- Inboard overhead electronics units

- Outboard overhead electronics units

- Digital passenger control unit (one for each seat)

- Cabin configuration test module

- Cabin system module (3)

23.33.0704 -004

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 10
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0204 -004

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 11
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 12
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0205 -004

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 13
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 14
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0206 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 15
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - POWER INTERFACE - 1

Power

The ENT SERV-AC circuit breaker sends 115v ac power to the

entertainment/service controller (ESC), central management unit
(CMU) and each local area controller (LAC).

The cabin configuration test module (CCTM) gets 28v ac from the
CMU.

The cabin system modules (CSMs) get 115v ac from the LAC.

23.33.0707 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 16
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0207 -003

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 17
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - POWER INTERFACE - 2

Purpose Zone A/B OEU Power

The PASSENGER SERVICES SYSTEM ON and OFF switches on When deenergized, reading light relay-1 sends 115v ac to the OEUs
any cabin system module (CSM) controls the 115v ac to the seat in zones A and B.
electronics units (SEUs) and the overhead electronics units (OEUs).
Each OEU also gets 115v ac power from a circuit breaker in the
P414 panel.
General Description

23.33.0708 -001
When the system gets power for the first time, a light in the
PASSENGER SERVICES SYSTEM ON switch comes on and 115v
ac goes to the SEUs and OEUs.

When the PASSENGER SERVICES SYSTEM OFF switch is

pushed, a signal goes through the local area controller (LAC) to the
entertainment/service controller (ESC). The ESC sends a ground to
reading light relay-1. When energized, reading light relay-1 sends a
ground to energize reading light relay-2, reading light relay-3, and
both SEU relays. When energized, the relays remove power from
the SEUs and OEUs.

Air/ground relay R121 sends a ground discrete to the ESC when the
airplane is in flight. In flight, the ESC cannot remove power from the
SEUs and OEUs.

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 18
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0208 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 19
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - POWER INTERFACE - 3

When deenergized, reading light relays 2 and 3 send 115v ac power

to the overhead electronics units (OEUs) in:

- Zones C and D
- Zone E
- The upper deck

Each OEU also gets 115v ac power from circuit breakers in the
P414 panel.

23.33.0709 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 20
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0209 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 21
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - POWER INTERFACE - 4

When deenergized, the SEU relays send 115v ac power to all the
seat electronics units (SEUs) in the airplane.

The SEUs send 10v dc to the digital passenger control units

(DPCUs).

23.33.0710 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 22
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0210 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 23
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS-ATTENDANT CALL/READING LIGHTS

Attendant Call/Reset Passenger Reading Lights

To call an attendant, push the attendant call switch on a digital When the passenger reading light switch is pushed on a DPCU, the
passenger control unit (DPCU). The command goes through the reading light command goes through the SEU to the LAC. The LAC
seat electronics unit (SEU) to the local area controller (LAC). The sends the command to an OEU which makes the reading light above
LAC then: the seat where the selection was made come on or go off.

- Makes a master call light at the appropriate attendants station

come on. Cabin System Module

- Sends data to the inboard or outboard overhead electronics units The cabin system module (CSM) gives attendants control of:
(OEUs) which make the row call light over the seat group come
on. - Passenger reading lights
- Row call lights
- Sends data through the entertainment/service controller (ESC) to - Passenger-to-attendant master call lights
the passenger address controller (PAC) which sounds the
23.33.0717 -001
attendant call chime.

Push the attendant reset switch on any DPCU in the seat group to
make the row call light and master call light go off. The chime off
switch sends a discrete to an overhead electronics unit. The discrete
stops passenger to attendant call chimes.

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 24
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0217 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 25
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 26
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS-LAVATORY/PASSENGER INFORMATION SIGNS

Lavatory Call

Push the lavatory (LAV) call switch to send a discrete to the inboard When the ESC gets a no smoking discrete:
overhead electronics unit (I-OEU) which then sends the data to the
local area controller (LAC). - The PAC makes a low chime

The LAC: - The NO SMOKING sign in each passenger information sign

comes on
- Makes the lavatory master call light at the attendants' station
come on When the ESC gets a fasten seat belts discrete:

- Sends data to the I-OEU which makes the lavatory call light come - The PAC makes a low chime
on
- The FASTEN SEAT BELT sign in each passenger information
- Sends data through the entertainment/service controller (ESC) to sign comes on
the passenger address controller (PAC) to make a single lavatory
call chime - The RETURN TO SEAT sign in each lavatory comes on

23.33.0718A-001
ESC Discrete Inputs

Discrete inputs control passenger information signs and lavatory

signs.

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 27
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

ESC Discrete Inputs (cont)

When the ESC gets a decompression discrete:

- The PAC makes a low chime

- The NO SMOKING and FASTEN SEAT BELT signs in each

passenger information sign comes on

- The RETURN TO SEAT sign in each lavatory goes off.

The I-OEU gets a lavatory-occupied discrete which makes the LAV

OCCUPIED sign on the passenger information signs come on.

The cabin system module (CSM) gives attendants control of:

- Lavatory call lights

- Lavatory master call lights

23.33.0718B-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 28
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0218 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 29
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS-CCTM CONTROLS

General Description

For the passenger service system (PSS), the cabin configuration

test module (CCTM) has switches to:

- Make the alternate circuit in the entertainment/service controller

(ESC) come on

- Make the cabin system modules (CSMs) control all passenger

seating areas. The CSMs ignore the areas set in the ACESS
configuration database (Not used by KLM)

- Adjust the number of rows in a smoking section (Not used by

KLM)

Normal/Alternate Circuit Selection

The CCTM has a passenger services alternate system switch. The

switch sends a discrete to the ESC to make either the normal or the
alternate controller circuit come on. Usually the normal circuit in the
ESC is on.

Each CSM can control all passenger seating areas in the airplane.

23.33.0719 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 30
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0219 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 31
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER PASSENGER ZONE

INTERFACES

Each local area controller (LAC) has an interface with seat

electronics units (SEUs), outboard overhead electronics units
(O-OEUs) and inboard overhead electronics units (I-OEUs) in one or
two passenger zones through interface cables. Each LAC has
interfaces with passenger zones:

- LAC 1: Zones A and B

- LAC 2: Zones C and D
- LAC 3: Zone E
- LAC 4: Upper deck

23.33.0720 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 32
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0220 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 33
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - DIGITAL PASSENGER CONTROL UNIT

Purpose

The digital passenger control unit (DPCU) gives passengers: The passenger reading light switch makes the passenger reading
light above the seat come on or go off.
- Control of reading lights
CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
- A switch used to call cabin attendants READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
Operation BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

Push button switches give control of passenger service functions.

23.33.0721 -001

The attendant call switch:

- Makes the row call light in the passenger service unit over the
seat come on - Makes the passenger-to- attendant master call
light (BLUE) at the attendants station come on

- Makes a chime sound at the attendants station

The attendant call reset switch makes the master attendant call and
row call lights go off. The attendant call reset switch on any DPCU in
a seat group can reset the attendant call started from any DPCU
within the seat group.

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 34
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0221 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 35
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - SEAT ELECTRONICS UNIT

General

The seat electronics unit (SEU) gets reading and call light data from CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
the digital passenger control unit (DPCU) and sends the data to the READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
local area controller (LAC). An SEU can interface with one, two, ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
three or four DPCUs. (REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.33.0722 -001
Power

The PASSENGER SERVICES SYSTEM switches on any cabin

system module (CSM) controls power to the SEUs.

SEU Termination Plug

A termination plug connects to the J2 connector of the last seat

electronics unit (SEU) in a column. The SEU termination plug has a
75 ohm resistor which agrees with the characteristic impedance of
the transmission cable. The SEU termination plug also has a wire
attached to a lug that fits in the seat track and is the power ground
for the SEU column.

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 36
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0222 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 37
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER

Purpose

The local area controllers (LACs) get and send multiplexed data
from the entertainment/service controller (ESC), cabin system
module (CSM), overhead electronics units (OEUs) and seat
electronics units (SEUs).

Characteristics

The local area controller has three independent assemblies. One

assembly does functions of the passenger address system, one
does functions of the cabin interphone system, and one does
functions of passenger entertainment, passenger service and cabin
lighting systems.

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.33.0723 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 38
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0223 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 39
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - MASTER CALL LIGHTS

The passenger-to-attendant and lavatory-to-attendant master call

lights are controlled by a local area controller (LAC). The master call
lights are near each attendant station.

If either master call light is on, it means that there was a call from a
passenger seat or lavatory. The attendant looks at the lavatory or
row call lights to see where the call came from. When the call lights
in the area of the attendants' station are reset, the master call lights
go off.

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.33.0724 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 40
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0224 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 41
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - ENTERTAINMENT/SERVICE CONTROLLER

Purpose

The entertainment/service controller (ESC) gets discretes and digital

data inputs, and makes digital data outputs which control the
passenger service system.

General Description

The ESC has a normal circuit and an alternate controller circuit. One
controller circuit does all the functions of the ESC. Only one
controller circuit operates at a time. If there is a failure of the normal
controller, the alternate controller does the functions of the ESC. The
alternate controller is manually selected with controls on the cabin
configuration test module (CCTM).

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.33.0725 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 42
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0225 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 43
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - INBOARD OVERHEAD ELECTRONICS UNIT

Purpose

The inboard overhead electronics units (I-OEUs) make these lights An I-OEU can get up to four discrete inputs, such as a lavatory call
come on or go off: or lavatory call reset discretes. Power

- Passenger reading lights The I-OEU gets two power inputs for passenger service functions.
- Row call lights They are:
- Passenger information signs
- The return to seat sign in the lavatories - 115v ac unswitched power (direct from a circuit breaker) for
passenger information signs and lavatory signs

Characterisitcs - 115v ac switched power for the reading and call lights.

Each I-OEU has two independent subsystems which control The PASSENGER SERVICES SYSTEM switches on any cabin
functions of the passenger address and passenger service/cabin system module (CSM) control switched power.
lighting systems. Only passenger service functions are discussed
here. CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
One I-OEU controls up to: ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
- Eight reading lights BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.
- Four call lights
23.33.0726 -001
- Six passenger information sign modules

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 44
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0226 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 45
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - OUTBOARD OVERHEAD ELECTRONICS UNIT

Purpose Power

The outboard overhead electronics units (O-OEUs) make these The O-OEU gets two power inputs for passenger service functions.
lights come on or go off: They are:

- Passenger reading lights - 115v ac unswitched power (direct from a circuit breaker), for
- Row call lights passenger information signs
- Passenger information signs
- 115v ac switched power for the reading and call lights

Characteristics The PASSENGER SERVICES SYSTEM switches on any cabin

system module (CSM) control switched power.
Each O-OEU does functions of the passenger service/cabin lighting
systems. Only passenger service functions are discussed here. CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
One O-OEU controls up to: ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
- Six reading lights BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.
- Two call lights
23.33.0727 -001
- Six passenger information sign modules

An O-OEU can get up to four discrete inputs.

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 46
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0227 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 47
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - OUTBOARD OVERHEAD ELECTRONICS

UNIT-INSTALLATION

The outboard overhead electronics units (O-OEUs) are on

approximately every other passenger service unit (PSU) panel.

The PSU panel assembly is held in place by three latches. Push a

rod into the holes in the face of the PSU panel to release the
assembly. Lanyards makes sure that the PSU panel assembly does
not swing freely. Three screws hold the O-OEU in place.

23.33.0728 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 48
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0228 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 49
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - PASSENGER SERVICE UNIT

The passenger service system interfaces with passenger service

units (PSUs) to control:

- Passenger reading lights

- Row call lights
- passenger information signs

23.33.0729 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 50
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0229 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 51
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - LIGHT/CHIME CONTROL MODULE

Chime off switches on the light/chime control module, inhibit

passenger-to-attendant call chimes. A chime sounds at an
attendant's station each time the passenger-to-attendant call button
is pushed on a digital passenger control unit (DPCU). Sometimes,
the chime is generated but does not really indicate a call. For
example:

- A child repeatedly pushes the call switch

- A sleeping passenger accidentally pushes the call switch

- The DPCU has a failure

The attendant can push the chime off switch to stop the chime. The
row call light and master call light still come on.

The chime off switch does not affect lavatory-to-attendant calls or

cabin interphone calls.

23.33.0730 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 52
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0230 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 53
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - PASSENGER INFORMATION SIGNS

Light modules inside a passenger information sign are controlled by

an inboard or outboard overhead electronics unit (OEU). A bill board
type passenger information sign contains six light modules. The
configuration database determines which light module comes on for
a discrete input to the passenger service system. Discrete inputs
include:

- No smoking
- Fasten seat belts
- Decompression
- Lavatory occupied

23.33.0731 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 54
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0231 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 55
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - LAVATORY

General

Components in the lavatories interface with ACESS through the - Lavatory call light/reset switch: this unit is a lavatory call light and
inboard overhead electronics units I-OEUs. The I-OEU accepts a switch to reset the lavatory call.
discrete inputs and sends the data to the local area controller (LAC).
Control data then goes back to the I-OEU to make the lavatory call - RETURN TO SEAT sign: the sign comes on when the FASTEN
light and RETURN TO SEAT sign go on or off. SEAT BELT signs come on. The decompression discrete inhibits
the RETURN TO SEAT sign.

23.33.0732 -001
Function

The function of the lavatory components that interface with the

I-OEU are:

- Lavatory door latch: produces lavatory occupied discrete when

door latch is locked. This discrete controls the lavatory
OCCUPIED sign in the passenger information sign.

- Lavatory call switch: this switch turns on the lavatory call light
outside the lavatory door, the lavatory master call light, and
sounds a chime.

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 56
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0232 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 57
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - CABIN SYSTEM MODULE

Purpose

The cabin system module (CSM) gives attendants control of

passenger reading lights, passenger to attendant calls and cabin
lighting in the passenger seating area shown in the CSM display.
The CSM also controls:

- Power to the seat electronics units (SEUs)

- Power to the overhead electronics units (OEUs)

CSM Display

A one line, sixteen character LED display shows the selected

passenger seating area. The description comes from the
configuration database. For example, AREA 1, FIRST CLASS, FWD
AREA, or any other description can describe the first passenger
seating area.

The CSM display and a light in each button goes off if none of the
buttons are pushed for five minutes.

23.33.0733A-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 58
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Area Select Button

Push the AREA SELECT button to see the passenger seating areas To return control of the reading lights to the DPCUs, push the
that a CSM controls. NORMAL button. When pushed, a light in the NORMAL button
comes on.

Reading Light Buttons

Attendant Call RESET Button
The reading light buttons operate in an absolute or momentary
mode. The configuration database sets the mode. In either mode, Push the attendant call RESET button to make a light in the button
the reading light buttons make all passenger reading lights in the come on and the call lights in the area shown in the CSM display go
area shown in the CSM display come on or go off. off. The call lights that go off are:

In the momentary mode, push the ON or OFF button to: - Attendant row call lights

- Make the reading lights come on or go off. - Passenger to attendant master call lights

- Make a light in the button come on and then go off. When the - Lavatory master call lights
light goes off, a light in the NORMAL button comes on.
When all the call lights are off, the light in the RESET switch goes
In the absolute mode, push the ON or OFF button to: off.

23.33.0733B-001
- Make the reading lights come on or go off.

- Make a light in the button come on.

- Remove control of reading lights from the DPCUs.

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 59
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Cabin Lighting Buttons

The operation of the CABIN LIGHTING switches are discussed in

ATA Chapter 33 (Lighting).

Passenger Services System Buttons

The PASSENGER SERVICES SYSTEM ON and OFF buttons

control power to the inboard and outboard overhead electronics
units (OEUs), and the seat electronics units (SEUs). The selected
switch (light) comes on to show the present selection.

The passenger services system ON and OFF switches control all

passenger seating areas. Any CSM can control power to the OEUs
and SEUs.

Audio Entertainment Buttons

The operation of the AUDIO ENTERTAINMENT buttons are

discussed in the passenger entertainment system.

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.33.0733C-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 60
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0233 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 61
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - CABIN CONFIGURATION TEST MODULE

General Description

For the passenger service system (PSS), the cabin configuration When this occurs, the alternate circuit does all ESC functions. If the
test module (CCTM) has switches to: light in TEST MODE switch is on, then the passenger services
alternate system switch does not operate.
- Do a PSS test
- Install the ACESS configuration database
- Install operational software CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE
- Make the alternate circuit in the entertainment/service controller READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
(ESC) come on ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.
Normal/Alternate Circuit Selection
23.33.0734 -001

The CCTM has a passenger services alternate system switch. The

switch sends a discrete to the ESC to make either the normal or the
alternate controller circuit come on. Usually the normal circuit in the
ESC is on. Push the PASSENGER SERVICES switch to:

- Make the alternate circuit come on

- Make the normal circuit go off
- Make a light in the switch come on

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 62
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0234 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 63
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - CENTRAL MANAGEMENT UNIT

The CMU also has some PSS maintenance functions. The CMU is
used to:

- Do a PSS test
- Install the ACESS configuration database
- Install operational software

The maintenance functions are discussed in the ACESS

maintenance practices lesson.

CAUTION: STATIC SENSITIVE. DO NOT HANDLE BEFORE

READING PROCEDURE FOR HANDLING
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE SENSITIVE DEVICES
(REF 20-41-02/201). CONTAINS DEVICES THAT CAN
BE DAMAGED BY STATIC DISCHARGE.

23.33.0735 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 64
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0235 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 65
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 66
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0238 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 67
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 68
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0239 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 69
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 70
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - ENTERTAINMENT/SERVICE CONTROLLER DISCRETES

No Smoking Discrete
General
The ESC gets a no smoking discrete when the no smoking switch
The entertainment/service controller (ESC) gets discrete inputs from: (S1) on the passenger information signs module is ON, or when the
switch is in AUTO and:
- The crew alerting card, located in the MAWEA (modularized
avionics warning electronics assembly) through the passenger - The landing gear is not up and locked, or
information signs module (P8)
- The cabin pressure altitude is more than 10,000 feet.
- The R36 decompression relay

The discretes control the passenger information signs (no smoking Fasten Seat Belt Discrete
and fasten seat belt) and the RETURN TO SEAT sign in the
lavatories. The ESC gets a fasten seat belt discrete when the fasten seat belts
switch (S2) on the passenger information signs module is ON, or
The no smoking and fasten seat belt discretes cause passenger when the switch is in AUTO and:
information signs to come on. The decompression discrete causes
the passenger information signs to come on, and the RETURN TO - The flaps are not up, or
SEAT sign in the lavatories to go off.
- The landing gear is not up, and locked, or
The no smoking and decompression discretes make the no smoking
LED on the digital passenger control units come on. - The cabin pressure altitude is more than 10,000 feet, or

23.33.0740A-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 71
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Fasten Seat Belt Discrete (cont)

- The airplane altitude is less than 10,300 feet

Decompression

The ESC gets a decompression discrete when the passenger

oxygen lines are pressurized.

Chime Generation

When the ESC gets a no smoking or fasten seat belt discrete, the
passenger address controller (PAC) also gets those discretes. The
PAC makes a low chime sound in the passenger cabin when the
passenger information signs come on or go off.

When the ESC gets a decompression discrete, a digital output goes

to the PAC. The PAC makes a low chime sound in the passenger
cabin.

23.33.0740B-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 72
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0240 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 73
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - ESC OPERATION

Normal and Alternate Circuits Operation

The entertainment/service controller (ESC) has these two fully The ESC gets discrete inputs for control of:
redundant controller circuits:
- Passenger information signs (no smoking and fasten seat belts)
- Normal
- Alternate - The return to seat sign in each lavatory

Each circuit can do all ESC functions. All interfaces with the ESC The ESC sends commands to the local area controllers (LACs). The
connect in parallel to both circuits through a motherboard. LACs send commands to the seat electronics units and overhead
electronics units to make the applicable lights come on or go off.
Normally, the passenger services switch on the cabin configuration
test module (CCTM) is open. When it is open, it sends an open The LACs send attendant call data to the ESC. The ESC sends a
discrete to an inverter on the motherboard of the ESC (an open is a command to the passenger address controller (PAC) which makes a
logic one). This sends a logic zero to switch S1. The switch sends chime sound at the attendants station.
115v ac to the normal controller circuit.
23.33.0741A-001

When the passenger services switch closes, it sends a ground

discrete from the ESC back to the ESC to an inverter on the
motherboard (a ground is a logic zero). This sends a logic one to
switch S1. The switch sends 115v ac to the alternate controller and
removes power from the normal circuit. Thus, the alternate circuit
now does all the ESC functions.

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 74
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 75
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - LOCAL AREA CONTROLLER OPERATION

General

The local area controller (LAC) has an interface with the: - Sends a command to the OEUs which make the row call light
come on
- Entertainment/service controller (ESC)
- Sends chime data to the ESC which sends it to the PAC
- Cabin system module (CSM)
Other DPCU selections, such as attendant call reset and reading
- Overhead electronics units (OEUs) light on/off, operate the same.

- Passenger to attendant master call lights

I-OEU Interface
- Lavatory to attendant master call lights
The LAC gets lavatory data from the I-OEUs.
- Seat electronics units (SEUs)
When the attendant call button is pushed in a lavatory, the I-OEU
sends the selection to the LAC.
SEU Interface

23.33.0742A-001
The LAC gets DPCU data from the SEUs.

When the attendant call button is pushed on a DPCU, the SEU

sends the selection to the LAC. The LAC:

- Makes the applicable passenger-to-attendant master call light

come on

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 76
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

I-OEU Interface (cont)

The LAC: CSM Interface

- Makes the lavatory to attendant master call light come on The LAC gets data from the CSM to control:

- Sends a command back to the I-OEU which makes the lavatory - Reading lights
call light come on - Attendant call lights
- OEU and SEU power
- Sends chime data to the ESC which sends it to the PAC
The LAC sends the data through ESC to the other LACs. The LACs
use the data to control lights in the passenger seating areas that
I-OEU/O-OEU Interface they connect to.

The LAC sends commands to the I-OEUs and O-OEUs which make
these lights come on or go off: ESC Interface

- Passenger reading lights The ESC sends the LAC:

- Row call lights
- Lavatory call lights (I-OEUs only) - Passenger reading light and row call light commands from the
- Return to seat signs (I-OEUs only) other LACs
- Passenger information sign commands

The LAC sends commands to the OEUs which make the lights come
on or go off.

23.33.0742B-001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 77
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 78
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0242 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 79
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - CABIN SYSTEM MODULE OPERATION

General

The attendants use the cabin system modules (CSMs) to control:

- Passenger reading lights

- Attendant calls
- Power to the overhead electronics units (OEUs)
- Power to the seat electronics units (SEUs)

Operation

Lamp drivers make lights come on in the keypad buttons to show the
status of the passenger seating area shown in the CSM's display.

Push the keypad buttons to send a command through the local area
controller (LAC) to the entertainment/service controller (ESC). The
ESC sends the command to the LAC that controls the passenger
seating area shown in the CSM's display.

23.33.0743 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 80
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0243 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 81
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - SEU/DPCU OPERATION

DPCU Selections

The DPCU keypad sends attendant call, attendant call reset, and
reading light on/off data to the DPCU's microprocessor. The DPCU
sends the data through an SEU to the LAC.

23.33.0744 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 82
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0244 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 83
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - READING LIGHT/ROW CALL LIGHT OPERATION

The local area controller (LAC) sends passenger-to-attendant call

and reading light data to the inboard and outboard overhead
electronics units (OEUs). The OEU's microprocessor sends
commands to the lamp drivers which make the passenger reading
lights and row call lights come on or go off.

An inboard overhead electronics unit can control eight reading lights

and four row call lights. An outboard overhead electronics unit can
control six reading lights and two row call lights.

23.33.0745 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 84
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0245 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 85
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - LAVATORY OPERATION

Lavatories have an interface with an inboard overhead electronics

unit (I-OEU).

An I-OEU can get four discrete inputs. The lavatory sends these
discretes to the I-OEU's discrete input buffer:

- Lavatory to attendant call

- Lavatory call reset
- Lavatory occupied

The I-OEU sends this data to the local area controller (LAC).

The LAC sends data to the I-OEU to make lights in the lavatory
come on or go off. The I-OEU uses its passenger information sign
lamp drivers to make these lights come on:

- Lavatory call
- Return to seat

23.33.0746 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 86
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0246 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 87
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - PASSENGER INFORMATION SIGN OPERATION

An overhead electronics unit (OEU) can control six lamp circuits with
its passenger information sign lamp drivers. A billboard-type
passenger information sign, like the one shown in this graphic, uses
all six lamp drivers.

The OEU gets commands from the LAC which make lights in the
sign come on or go off.

23.33.0747 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 88
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0247 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 89
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - CHIME MUTE OPERATION

The chime/light control module (on an attendants panel), sends

chime off discretes (forward and aft) to an overhead electronics unit
(OEU). The OEU sends chime off data to the local area controller
(LAC). The LAC sends the data to an inboard overhead electronics
unit (I-OEU).

The I-OEU stops chimes for passenger to attendant calls from any
seat rows (forward and/or aft) assigned to that attendants station by
the configuration database.

23.33.0748 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 90
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0248 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 91
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

PSS - PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES

The passenger service system (PSS) uses the ACESS configuration

database to control some PSS functions. All ACESS systems use
part of the configuration database. For PSS, this database has data
that:

- Sets the rows that each passenger seating area has

- Gives the passenger seating areas a name (shows on the cabin

system module (CSM) display)

- Sets the passenger seating areas that a CSM can control

- Sets the passenger reading light control modes on the CSMs to

momentary or absolute

23.33.0749 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 92
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

23.33.0249 -001

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 93
k engineering & maintenance
Training E & M
COMMUNICATION
Passenger Service System
Boeing 747-400
Avionics

NOTES:

Config: ALL ATA 23-33

Issue: 1 Page 94